P. 1
NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

|Views: 227|Likes:
Published by mrgluk
This manual contains information on EP-3J mission peculiar aircraft systems and operating procedures.
This manual contains information on EP-3J mission peculiar aircraft systems and operating procedures.

More info:

Published by: mrgluk on Apr 14, 2014
Copyright:Traditional Copyright: All rights reserved

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

08/23/2014

pdf

text

original

NATOPS

PARTIAL FLIGHT MANUAL NAVY MODEL

EP-3J
AIRCRAFT
THIS PUBLICATION IS INCOMPLETE WITHOUT NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-3.1. NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 AND

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C - Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their contractors to protect publications required for official use or for administrative or operational purposes only (1 October 1997). Other requests for this document shall be referred to Commanding Officer, Naval Air Defense Distribution Depot Susquehanna Technical Services Facility, Pennsylvania, Bldg. 05, 5450 Carlisle Pike, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055-0789. DESTRUCTION NOTICE method that will prevent document. For unclassified, limited disclosure of contents documents, destroy or reconstruction by any of the

1

ISSUED BY AUTHORITY OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR SYSTEMS COMMAND I (Reverse Blank)

0801LP0163970

1 OCTOBER

1997

NATEC ELECTRONIC MANUAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-4.3

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS 2000NAVY PENTAGON WASHINGTON, D.C. 20350-2000 1 October 1997

LETTER OF PROMULGATION 1. Tbe Naval Air Training and Operating ProceduresStandardization(NATOPS) Program is a positive approachtoward improving combat readiness and achieving a substantialreductionin the aircraftmishap rate.Standardization, basedon professionalknowledgeandexperience,providesthe basisfor developmentof an efficient andsoundoperationalprocedure.The standardization program is not plannedto stifle individual initiative, but rather to aid the commanding officer in increasing the unit’s combatpotential without reducingcommandprestigeor responsibility. 2. This manual standardizes ground and flight proceduresbut does not include tactical doctrine. Compliance with the stipulated manual requirementsand procedures is mandatory except as authorizedherein.In orderto remain effective,NATOPS must bedynamic andstimulate ratherthan suppressindividual thinking. Since aviation is a continuing, progressiveprofession, it is both desirableand necessary that new ideasand new techniques be expeditiouslyevaluatedand incorporated if proven to be sound.To this end, commanding officers of aviation units are authorizedto modify procedurescontained herein, in accordancewith the waiver provisions establishedby OPNAVINST 3710.7,for the purposeof assessing new ideasprior to initiating recommendations for permanentchanges.This manual is preparedand kept currentby the usersin order to achieve maximum readinessand safety in the most efficient and economicalmanner. Should conflict exist between the training and operating proceduresfound in this manual and those found in other publications,this manual will govern. 3. Checklists andotherpertinentextractsfrom this publication necessary to normal operationsand training shouldbe made and carried for use in naval aircraft.

DENNIS V. McGINN RearAdmiral, U.S. Navy Director, Air Warfare

3 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

Oi-75PAA-1.3

I
The following
INTERIM CHANGE NUMBER(S)

INTERIM

CHANGE

SUMMARY incorporated in this manual:

Interim Changes have been canceled or previously

REMARKS/PURPOSE

Thefollowing
INTERIM CHANGE NUMBER(S)

Interim Changes have been incorporated

in this Change/Revision:

REMARKS/PURPOSE

Interim Changes Outstanding
INTERIM CHANGE NUMBER

- To be maintained
PAGES AFFECTED

by the custodian of this manual:

ORIGINATOR/DATE (or DATEfrIME GROUP)

REMARKS/PURPOSE

5 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

SUMMARY
CHANGE NUMBER

OF APPLICABLE
DESCRlPllON

TECHNICAL
DATE INC. IN MANUAL

DIRECTIVES
VlSUAL IDENllFlCATlON

Information relatingto thefollowing recenttechnical directives bar beenincorporated in this manual.

Information relatingto thefollowing applicable technical directives
CHANGE NUMBER DESCRlPTlON

will beincorporated in afihrre change.
VlBUAL IDENTIFICATION

7 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR @I-75PAA-1.3

RECORD OF CHANGES

9 (Reverse Blankl

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

EP-3J Aircraft Natops Flight Manual
Contents

PART I - AIRCRAFT CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1
1.1.1 THE AIRCRAFT Mission Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-l Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-I

CHAPTER 2 - SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT
2.14 2.15 2.16 2.11 MISSION PRIMARY MISSION SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BREAKER .

. . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

400/60 HZ CONVERTER.

CHAPTER 3 -SERVICING
3.4.10 Pod Radiation Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-l

CHAPTER 4 -OPERATING
4.12

LIMITS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-l

STORE LIMITATIONS

CHAPTER 5 -ARMAMENT PART II - INDOCTRINATION CHAPTER 6 -TRAINING
6.1 6.4.3 6.6

LIMITATIONS

AND QUALIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-l REQUIREMENTS . . . .6-l

INTRODUCTION.........................................6-1 Tactical Crew Complement . . . . . , . . . QUALIFICATION, CURRENCY,

AND REQUALIFICATION

PART Ill - NORMAL PROCEDURES CHAPTER 7 - NORMAL PROCEDURES (GENERAL) CHAPTER 6 - NORMAL PROCEDURES (FLIGHT STATIONS)

I1

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-1.3

Page NO. CHAPTER 9 - FUNCTIONAL CHECKFLIGHT PROCEDURES PART IV - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS CHAPTER 10 - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS PART V - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHAPTER 11 -ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS

CHAPTER 12 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (GENERAL) 12.8 12.9 12.10 DITCHING BAILOUT . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-l . . . . 12-1

SMOKE OR ELECTRICAL FUMES OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN . . . . . . . . EMERGENCIES EMERGENCIES

CHAPTER 13 -GROUND CHAPTER 14 -TAKEOFF

CHAPTER 15 - IN-FLIGHT EMERGENCIES CHAPTER 16 -APPROACH CHAPTER 17 -EMERGENCY PART VI-ALL-WEATHER AND LANDING EMERGENCIES EQUIPMENT

OPERATION OPERATION PROCEDURES PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . 19-1

CHAPTER 16 -ALL-WEATHER PART VII -COMMUNICATION

CHAPTER 19 -COMMUNICATION 19.1 19.3 19.3.1 19.3.2 COMMUNICATIONS

RADIO COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-l Voice............................................... 19-1 CW . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . 19-1 EQUIPMENT

CHAPTER 20 -COMMUNICATION PART VIII MISSION SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 21-

MISSION SYSTEMS OVERVIEW

CHAPTER 22 - MISSION EQUIPMENT 22.1 22.1.1 22.1.2 ORIGINAL INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, 4X-22 AND AUXILIARY ICS CONTROL . . . 22-1 ComponentsDescription. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I. : . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1 Master ICS Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1 12

22.1.3 22.14 22.15 22.16 22.1.7 22.1.8 22.1.9 22.1.10 22.1.11 22.1.12 22.1.13 22.1.14 22.1.15 22.1.16 22.1.17 22.1.18 22.1.19 22.1.20 22.2 22.2.1 22.2.2 22.2.3 22.3 22.3.1 22.3.2 22.3.3 22.3.4 22.35 22.36 22.4 22.4.1 22.4.2 22.4.3 22.4.4 22.4.5 22.46 22.5 22.5.1 22.5.2 22.5.3 22.6 22.6.1 22.6.2 22.6.3 22.7 22.7.1 22.7.2

Microphone SelectorSwitch .................................. KS SEL Switch ......................................... SPEARER PHONES Switch .................................. Alternate Switch ......................................... Disconnect Switch ....................................... Override Switch ......................................... Radio Monitor Switches ..................................... Crew Control Panel ....................................... ICS SEL Switch ......................................... Receiver Select Switches .................................... Volume Control ......................................... KS IntemoMection Box UniversalJackBox . ..::::::::::::::::::. Service Jack Box. ........................................ Loud Speakers .......................................... ICS Extensions. ......................................... IntercommunicationFunctions ................................. COMMAND BELL .......................................

...................................

22-l 22-1 22-l 22-2 22-2 22-2 22-2 22-2 22-2 223 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-5 . . . . . . . . 22-5 22-5 22-5 22-5

AUXILIARY ICS SYSTEM .............................. Auxiliary ICS Control Functional Description ..................... ComponentDescription ................................. Auxiliary ICS Control OperatingProcedures ...................... AN/ARC-190(V) HF RADIO SET ........................... ReceiverfDansmitterRT-134l(V)3/ARC-190(V) ................... Control Panel C-10828(V)2/ARC-190 ......................... Antenna ......................................... Antenna Coupler CU-2275(V)UARC-190(V) ................... ComponentControls and Indicators ... ; ........................ AN/ARC-190(V) Opemting Procedures ........................ CA-33 AN/ARC-l59 UHF ............................... ComponentDescription ................................. RT-115O/ARC-159Receiver/Transmitter........................ MT-4658/ARC-159 Mount ............................... ComponentControls and Indicators ........................... Power Distribution .................................... ComponentDescription/Switchology .......................... AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM ComponentDescription Controls and Indicators AN/ARC- 187SATCOM SYSTEM (WITH SECURE VOICE) ............ ................................. ................................. System OperatingPmcedums ................

..

22-8 22-9 22-9 22-9 22-9 ‘22-10 22-11 22-l 1 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-15 22-16 22-16 22-16 22-20 22-20 22-21 22-22 22-26 22-26 22-28 ORIGINAL

ANNSQ-113(V)l RADIO COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM ............. System Description .................................... ComponentDescription .................................. Special OperatingProcedures ............................... LTN-72 INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM NO. 2 (INS 2) ............. ComponentDescription .................................. Power Requirements.................................... 13

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Page NO. 22.7.3 22.7.4 22.1.5 22.8 22.8.1 22.8.2 22.9 22.9.1 22.9.2 22.10 22.10.1 22.10.2 22.11 22.11.1 22.11.2 22.12 22.12.1 22.12.2 22.12.3 22.13 22.13.1 22.13.2 22.13.3 22.13.4 22.14 22.14.1 22.14.2 22.14.3 22.14.4 22.14.5 22.15 22.15.1 22.15.2 22.15.3 22.16 22.16.1 22.16.2 22.16.3 22.16.4 22.17 22.17.1 22.17.2 Operation ..................................... EmergencyTurn-Off Procedures ........................ Componentsand Special OperatingProcedures ................ WJ-8718HF SCANNING RECEIVER ..................... System Description ............................... WJ-8718 OperatingProcedures ......................... WING STORES CONTROL SYSTEM AND AN/ALQ-170(V) SYSTEM . ComponentDescription ............................. System Operation ................................ ............................ VHSVCREQUIPMENT ComponentDescription ............................. System Operation ................................ MD-1203kJLT AUDIO MODULATOR SYSTEM ............... ComponentDescription .............................. System Operation ................................. UNIVERSAL PYLON WIRING ......................... System Description ................................ Power Distribution ................................. System Operation ................................. B2 RADAR SIMULATOR SYSTEM ............................ ... CgmponentDescription .... .................................................. B Control Functions, Controls,and Indicators Power Distribution ....................................... SystemOperation ...................................... IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR STATION. ................. WE8718 HF 3 ScanReceiverControl ..................... AN/ARC-190 HF Radio System ........................ MDD-1203iULT Audio Modulator ....................... VHF/UHF SystemAN/ARC-l82 ........................ UHF System AN/ARC-159 ........................... TACIEWO STATION .............................. AN/ARC-l59 UHF 2 Radio System ...................... UHF/UHF System AN/ARC-l82 ........................ ANNSQ-113 ECM 1 AND ECM 2 Countermeasures System ......... C2WSTATIONSlAND2 ........................... UHF Controls .................................. VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-l 82 ........................ AN/ARC-159UHF3throughUHF6RadioSystem .............. ANiUSQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures System ............... RADAR OPERATOR .............................. 8’ RadarSimulator System ........................... Video Home System ...............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-28 22-29 22-29 22-29 22-29 22-30 22-34 22-35 22-39 22-39 22-39 22-39

. . . . . . .

.

. .
.

. . 22-42 . . 22-42 22-43
. .

22-44 22-45 . . . . . 22-45 . . . 22-45 22-46 22-46 22-46 22-46 22-46 22-46 22-47 22-48 22-50 22-50 22-50 22-50 22-50 22-51 22-51 22-51 22-51 22-52 22-52 22-53

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 22-54 . . . . 22-54 . . 22-55

ORIGINAL

14

22.18 22.18.1 22.18.2 22.18.3

NAV/EWO STATION/STATION 8A . . . . . . AN/l67 SATCOM System (With SecureVoice) . Station 8A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing StoresControl System and AN/ALQ-170(V)

. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . System

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

.............

............. ............. .............

22-55 22-55 22-55 22-55

CHAPTER 23 - FLIGHT STATION SYSTEMS 23.1 23.2 23.2.1 23.2.2 23.2.3 23.2.4 23.3 23.3.1 23.3.2 23.3.3 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AN/ARC-l59 UHF 1 RADIO SYSTEM ComponentDescription . . . . . . . . . Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EmergencyTurnoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............

23-1

. 23-1 23-1 : 23-2 . 23-2 . 23-2 . . . . 23-2 23-3 23-3 23-3

AN/ALQ-170 POSITION DISPLAY INDICATOR ComponentDescription . . , , . . , . . . . . . . . Power Requirements. . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PART IX - FLIGHTCREW COORDlNATlON PART 24 - FLIGHTCREW COORDINATION (GENERAL) 24.1 24.2 24.2.1 24.2.2 24.2.3 24.2.4 24.2.5 24.2.6 24.2.7 24.2.8 24.2.9 24.2.10 24.2.11 24.3 24.3.1 24.3.2 24.3.3 24.3.4 24.3.5 24.3.6 24.3.7 24.3.8 24.3.9 24.3.10 24.3.11 24.3.12 INTRODUCTION..................................... PLANE COMMANDER . Flight Planning . . . . Mission Planning . . . . . Preflight . . . . . . . . . . Start/Taxi . . . . . . . . Takeomeparhue . . . . En Route . . . . . . . . . h4issions . . . . . . . . . . Return . . . . . . . . . . . PostlandinflaxXShutdown Postflight . .. . . . . . Debrief . . . . . . . . .
........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
................. ................. ................. ................. ................. .................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. .................

. 24-1 . . . . . . . : . . .
............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............

24-1 24-l 24-r 24-l 24-2 24-2 24-2 ;::: 24-2 24-2 24-2 24-2 24-2 24-2 24-3 24-3 24-3

TACTICAL ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER ..... Flight Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... MissionPlanning . . . . . . . . . . ........... Preflight .......... . . . , . ........... Taxi ............ . . . . . ........... Takeomeparhue ..... . . . . . ........... En Route .......... . . . . . ........... Missions .......... . . . . . ........... Retum ........... . . . . . ........... Descent/Approach...... . . . . . ........... PostlandingffaxiBhutdown . . . . . ........... Postflight .......... . . . . . ........... Debrief ........... . . . . . ...........

. . . . . .

. 2 . . . . 2 24-4 24-4 24-4

IS

ORlGlNAL

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-I.3

Page NO.

24.4 24.4.1 24.4.2 24.4.3 24.4.4 24.4.5 24.4.6 24.4.7 24.4.8 24.4.9 24.4.10 24.5 24.5.1 24.52 24.5.3 24.5.4 24.5.5 24.5.6 24.5.7 24.5.8 24.5.9 24.5.10 24.5.11 24.6 24.6.1 24.6.2 24.6.3 24.6.4 24.6.5 24.6.6 24.6.7 24.6.8 24.6.9 24.6.10 24.1 24.7.1 24.1.2 24.1.3 24.7.4 24.1.5 24.7.6 24.7.7 24.7.8
24.1.9

NAVIGATOR ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER .................... Flight Planning .......................................... Mission Planning. ........................................ Preflight ............................................. Start/Taxi.............................................24TakeofUDeparture ........................................ En Route ............................................. Mission. ............................................. Retum .............................................. Descent/Approach ......................................... Postlanding/Taxi/Shutdown ................................... C2W OFFICERS (C2Wl and C2W2). ............................. Mission Planning ........................................ Preflight ............................................. Sta~axi.............................................24Takeoff/Departure ........................................ En Route ............................................. Mission ............................................. Return .............................................. Descent/Approach ....................................... Postlanding/Taxi/Shutdown .................................. Postflight. ........................................... Debrief. ............................................ IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR ............................... Flight Planning ......................................... Mission Planning ....................................... Preflight ............................................ Taxi .............................................. TakeofUDeparture ....................................... En Route/Mission ....................................... Descent/Approach ....................................... Postlandinflaxi ........................................ Postflight ............................................ Debrief ............................................. RADAR OPERATOR ..................................... Flight Planning ......................................... Mission Planning ....................................... Preflight ............................................ Start/Taxi ............................................ TakeofUDepartore ....................................... En Route ............................................ Mission. ............................................ Descent/Approach ....................................... Postflight. ........................................... Debrief. ............................................
25 -AIRCREW RESPONSIBILITIES

24-4 24-4 24-5 24-5 5 24-6 24-6 24-7 24-7 24-7 24-7 24-7 24-7 24-8 8 24-8 24-8 24-9 24-9 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-10 24-11 24-11 24-l 1 24-l 1 24-l 1 24-l 1 24-11 24-l 1 24-11 24-12 24-12 24-13 24-13 24-13 24-13

24.7.10
CHAPTER

ORIGINAL

16

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

pxT
PART X - NATOPS EVALUATION CHAPTER 26 - NATOPS EVALUATION 26.12 26.13 26.14 26.15 26.16 26.17 26.18 FLIGHT STATION CHECKRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1 TACTICAL COORDINATOR/ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADlNG CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1 NAVIGATOR/ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADMG CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . 26-9 RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . 26-15 C2W STATION 1 AND 2 OPERATOR EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . . 2623 IN-FLIGHT TECHNICIANNATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . . . 26-25

PART XI - PERFORMANCE DATA CHAPTER 27 - PERFORMANCE DATA INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 26 -ENGINE CHAPTER 29 -TAKEOFF CHAPTER 30 -APPROACH CHAPTER 31 -CLIMB 31.1 AND LANDING PERFORMANCE DATA

AND DESCENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 l-l

CLIMB CONTROL CHARTS . . . . .

CHAPTER 32 - FLIGHT PLANNING CHAPTER 33 - OPERATING TABLES 33.3 USE OF OPERATING TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

I7 (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 9%75PAA-1.3

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Page No. CHAPTER 1 -GENERAL Figure l-2. DESCRIPTION . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .

OperatorStation Arrangement . . . . AND EQUIPMENT

l-2

CHAPTER 2 -SYSTEM Figure 2-46. Figure 247. Figure 2-48. Figure 2-49.

Electrical Bus Codes . . . . . . . Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Mission Circuit BreakerPanel . .. .. 60 Hz Circuit BreakerPanel . . . . . . . LIMITS

. . . . .

. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .

. . . . . . . . .

......

...... ...... ......

2-2 2-3 2-5 2-6

CHAPTER 4 -OPERATING Figure 4-6.

External and Internal StoresCarriedon P-3A Aircraft . PROCEDURES (GENERAL)

.

. . . . . .

4-2

CHAPTER 12 -EMERGENCY

Figure 12-9. Crew Stations . . . . . .. . . .. . . Figure 12-10. Priority of Ditching Station Assignments . . . . . . Figure 12-11. Crew EmergencyResponsibilities . . . . .. .. CHAPTER 19 -COMMUNICATION Figure 19-I. Antenna Locations . . PROCEDURES . . . . . .

. . . . . .

.

12-1 . . . . 12-2 . . . . 12-3

.

. . . .

19-2

CHAPTER 22 - MISSION SYSTEMS OVERVIEW Figure 22-l. Figure 22-2. Figure 22-3. Figure 22-4. Figure 22-5. Figure 22-6. Figure 22-7. Figure 22-8. Figure 22-9. Figure 22-10. Figure 22-11. Figure 22-12. Figure 22-13. Figure 22-14. Figure 22-15. Figure 22-16. Figure 22-17. Figure 22-18. Figure 22-19. Figure 22-20. Figure 22-21. Figure 22-22. Figure 22-23. Master ICS Control Unit C4162/AlC-22 .................... InterconnectionLine Grouping ......................... AUX ICS System Location ........................... AUX ICS System ................................ Auxiliary ICS Control Box Controls andIndicators .............. C-10828(V)2/ARC-190(V) Control Panel ................... C-10828(V)2/ARC-190ControlPanel ControlsandIndicators ........ RT-1 lSO/ARC-159 List of Components .................... C-9816/ARC-159 ................................ C-9816/ARC-159(V) Controls ......................... KY-58 Security Unit ............................... KY-58 Remote Control Unit. .......................... RT-1402A/G ARC-187 SATCOM System Controls and Indicators ...... RT-1402A/G ARC-187 Chapter34 SATCOM System Controls and Indicators ANAJSQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures SystemList of Components .... C-12160OperatorControl ............................ C-12160OperatorControl -Controls andIndicators ............. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Panel ................... High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Controls and Indicators ......... OperatorControl Keypad ............................ OperatorControl Keypad Functions ....................... COMM-I Mode Display Functions ....................... COMM-2 Mode Display Functions ....................... 19
. 22-2 . . . 22-4 . . . 22-6 22-l . . .22-10 . . 22-l 1 . .22-12 . <22-14 . . .22-15 . 22-16 . .22-17 . . 22-17 . . . 22-18 . . . 22-19 . . .22-21 . 22-21 . . . 22-22 . . .22-23 . .22-24 . . .22-24 . . .22-25 . 22-27 . . 22-28

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3
Page NO.

Figure 22-24. Figure 22-25. Figure 22-26. Figure 22-27. Figure 22-28. Figure 22-29. Figure 22-30. Figure 22-31. Figure 22-32. Figure 22-33. Figure 22-34. Figure 22-35. Figure 22-36.

INS No. 2 System Components .................... WJ-8718A HF ScanningReceiver. .................. WJ-87 18A/MFP HF ReceiverControlsand Indicators ........ C-I 1508/ALQ-170(V) Controller-Indicator. ............. C-11508 Controller-Indicator ControlsandIndicators ........ Dual Video Monitors ......................... Video Monitor Controls ........................ AN/ALQ-170(V) SystemInterconnectWiring Components ..... MD-l 203AK.T Modulator Front PanelControls and Indicators ... MD-1203/ULT Modulator Front Panel Controls and Indicators ... B2 Control Function SelectSwitches ................. CompassSystem Controllers Functions ................ LTN-72/ASN-124 Interconnections..................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22-29 22-30 22-31 22-35 22-36 22-39 2240 22-41 22-43 2244 2247 22-58 22-59

CHAPTER 26 - NATOPS EVALUATION Figure 26-I. Figure 26-2. Figure 26-3. Figure 26-4. Figure 26-5. TACYEWO NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet . . . . . .. . , . MOD In-Flight CommunicatorNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet MOD SensorStation Three OperatorNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet . MOD C3CM Station 1 and 2 OperatorNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet In-Flight Technician NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet . . . . . . . AND DESCENT . . 31-2
. . . .

. . . . . .

26-2 26-10 26-16 26-21 26-26

CHAPTER 31 -CLIMB

Figure 31-12. Four-EngineClimb Control -Normal RatedPower Climb Performance-Configuration E . . . .. . . . . . CHAPTER 33 -OPERATING TABLES

Figure.33-23. Four-Engine Maximum-Range OperatingTable - Configuration E FOLDOUTS Figure FO-1. Figure FO-2. Figure.FO-3. Figure FO-4. ASN-124 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . .. Flight Station Circuit Breaker Panels . . . . . . Main Load CenterCircuit BreakerPanels . . . . Electronic Bay Circuit BreakerPanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .

. .

33-2

. . . .

. . . . . . . . .

FO-1 FO-2 FO-3 FO-4

ORIGINAL

20

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
A ADF. Automatic direction finding. ADRS. Address. AFC. Automatic frequencycontrol. AGC. Automatic gain control. ALL. All stations. AM. Amplitude modulation. ASSY. Assembly. AUX. Auxiliary. B BDHI. Bearing distanceheadingindicator. BFO. Beat frequencyoscillator. BITE. Built-in test equipment. BU. Battery unit. c C’W. Command and control warfare. CAC. Compassadaptercompensator. CALIB. Calibration. ccw. Counterclockwise. CDU. Control display unit. CMSS. Countermeasures simulator set. COMM. Communication. COMM-1 . Communicationsmode 1. COMM-2. Communications mode 2. CPW. Characters per word. CW. Continuouswave.
21

CWF. Continuouswave frequency. CWV. Continuouswave voice. D DF. Direction finding. E EA. Electronic Attack. (formerly ECM) ECCM. Electronic counter-countermeasures. ECWI. Electronic countermeasures. EMI. Electromagneticinterference. EP. Electronic protection.(formerly ECM) ES. Electronic support. ESM. Electronic supportmeasures. EW. Electronic warfare. EXT. External. F FNIB. Forward navigation interconnectionbox. FS. Fuselagestation. G GD. Guard. GFI. Groundfault interrupt. H HERO. HazardousElectromagneticRadiation to Ordnance. HF. High frequency. HPA. High-poweredamplifier.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3 MOD. Modulator trigger. MSU. Mode selectunit. N

I ICS. Intercommunication system. IDC. Integrateddisplay computer. IF. Intermediatefrequency. INS. Internal navigation system. INT. Internal. INU. Inertial navigationunit. ISB. Integratedsideband. K kHr. Kilohertz. KY. crypto. L L. Left. LBA. Limits of basic aircraft. LCD. Liquid crystal display. LD. Lower sidebanddata. LOS. Line of sight. LSB. Lower sideband. LV. Lower sidebandvoice. LVL. Level. M MEM. Memory. MFD. Multifunction display. MFP. Microprocessorfront panel. MGC. Manual gain control. MHz. Megahertz. MIC. Microphone. MLC. Main load center.

NAV. Navigation. NAV/EWO. Navigation/Electronic WarfareOfficer.

NFO. Naval flight officers. NRL. Naval ResearchLaboratory. 0 OAT. Outsideair temperature. OFS. Offset. OSD. On-screendisplay. OTR. One-touchrecord. P P. Preset. PA. Public address. PDI. Position display indicator. POSN. Position. PPI. Plan position indicator. PPS. Pulsesper second. PRF. Pulserepetition frequency. PTT. Push-to-talk. PWR. Power. R R. Right. FUT. Receiver-transmitter. RC. Resistance-capacitance, RCU. Remote control unit.

ORIGINAL

22

RDY. Ready. RF. Radio frequency. RLY. Relay. RMS.

THRS. TAS.

Thrashold

Truaaimpeed.
U

Radarmonitoring system.
C. P.

UD. Upper sideband data. UHF. UPW. USB. Ultrahigh frequency. Universal pylon tiring. uppersideband

RX audio RX audio

Receiveaudio cipher. Receiveaudio plain. S

SAN.

Secureaudio switching unit.

UV. Upper sideband voice. V VAC. VCR. VDC. VHF. VHS. Volts alternating cnrmttt. Video cassette recorder.

SAT. Satellite. SATCOM.

Satellite communications.

SDC. Signal dataconverter.
SEL. SEM. SIM. Select. Standard electronic module.

Volts direct

current.

Very high frequency.
Video home system. W

Simultaneous. Simultaneousoperation.

SIMOP. SLP.

Superlong play.

WOD. WPM. WRA. WS.

Word-of-day. Words per minute. Weapons-replaceable Wing station. X assembly.

SP. Standard play.

SQ. Squelch. SRA. Shop-replaceable assembly.
STAG. Stagger. SYNC.

Synchronization.
T

XMIT.

Transmit.

TACIEWO. Officer.

Tactical Coordinator/Electronic

Warfare

23 (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-I.3

PREFACE
SCOPE The NATOPS flight manualis issuedby theauthority of the Chief of Naval Operations and under the Commander, Naval Air Systems Command together with the naval air training and operating procedures standardization (NATOPS) program. This manualcontains information on EP-3J mission peculiar aircraft systems and operatingproceduresrequired for safeand effective operations.However, it is not a substitute for soundjudgement. Compound emergencies, available facilities, or considerations affecting the lives andpropertyofothers may require modification of the procedurescontained herein. Read this manual from cover to cover.It’s your responsibilityto havecomplete knowledgeof its contents. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS The following publications compliment this manual: NAVAIROI-75PAC-I.1 (NFO/AIRCREWNATOPS manual) NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-IC (card checklist) NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-l.lC (weaponschecklist) NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-IF checklist) (functional checkflight Distribution Requirements List (ADRL) maintained by Naval Air Technical Services Facility (NAVAIRTECHSERVFAC), Philadelphia, PA. If thereis a continuing needfor this publication, eachactivity’s Central Technical Publication Librarian must send a revised ADRL report on floppy disk to NAVAIRTECHSERVFAC. Ifan activity doesnothave a library, then senda letter to the Commanding Offricer. NAVAIRTECHSERVFAC, Attn: Code 25 1, 700 Robbios Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19111requesting assignmeotof a distribution accountnumber (if oecessary)and automaticmailing of tXure issuesof thepublications needed. Note The ADRL floppy disk can be used only to place an activity 00 the mailing list for automatic distribution of future issuesof thepublications. It cannotbe usedto make one-time ordersofpublications from currentstock.To get publications from stock, see One-Time Ordersabove. Onceestablished on automaticdistriiution for this or any other NAVAIR technical publication, an activity must submit anADRL reportonfloppydiskatleastooce every 12 months to updateor contirm their automatic distribution requirements. Note Activities not submitting anADRLreport on floppy disk for more than 12 months may be dropped from distribution of all NAVAIR technicalpublications. UPDATING THE MANUAL One-Time Orders Ifthispublication isneededonaone-timebasis(without future updates),order it from stock by sending an electronic DD 1348 requisition in accordance with NPFC Publication 2002D found on NAVSUP Publication 600 (Naval Logistics Library) CD-ROM disc. Automatic Distribution (With Updates) To ensurethat the manual containsthe latest procedures and information, NATOPS review conferences are held in accordance with OPNAVINST 3710.7. CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS Recommendedchangesto this manual or other NATOPS publicationsmay be submitted by anyonein accordancewith OPNAVINST 3710.7.

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 (SUM) NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-12 Series(IFMM) HOW TO GET COPIES

This publication and changesto it are automatically sentto activities that are establishedon the Automatic

25

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3
NATOPWACTICAL CHANQE RECOMMENDATION OPNAV 3710/S (490) S/N 0107-LF40%7wo

DATE

TO BE FILLED IN BY ORIGINATOR AND FORWARDED TO MODEL MANAGER FROM (Orlginatw) TO (Model Manager) Complete Name of ManWChecklii Recommadatlon (be epedflc) Revision Date -w( Unit
I

Unit
SCtiOn/ChaptW

Page

ParaSraph

cl
JUStlficati0n

CHECK IF CONTlNUED ON SACK

Signature A&dress of Unii or Command

Rank

me

TO BE FILLED IN BY MODEL MANAGER (Return to Or/g/r&or) FROM DATE

REFERENCE (a3 Your Changs R-mend&on 0 Dated isacknowledged. tobeheldat Itwfllbeheldforactlonof

Your change recommendation dated the review conference planned for

0

YOUrchacge r-mendatlon

Is mc!assl%d URGENT and forwarded for approval to by my DTG

lw

MODEL MANAGER

AlRCW

ORIGINAL

26

Routine changerecommendationsare submitted directly to the model manageron OPNAV Form 3710/6 (4-90)shownherein.The address of the model manager of this aircraft is: Commanding Officer, VQ-11 Attention: NATOPS Officer NAS Brunswick, ME 04011 Change recommendations of an URGENT nature (safetyof flight, etc.)shouldbe submitteddirectly to the NATOPS advisory groupmember in the chain of command priority message. YOUR RESPONSIBILITY NATOPS flight manualsarekept currentthroughan active manual changeprogram. Any corrections,additions,or constructivesuggestions for improvementof its contentshouldbe submittedby routine or urgentchange recommendation, as appropriate,at once. NATOPS FLIGHT MANUAL INTERIM CHANGES Flight manual interim changesarechangesor corrections to the NATOPS flight manuals promulgatedby CNO or NAVAIRSYSCOM. Interim changesare issuedeither as printed pagesor as a naval message. The interim changesummary page is provided as a record of all interim changes.Upon receipt of a change or revision, the custodianof the manual should check the updatedinterim changesummary to determinethat all outstandinginterim changeshave beeneither incorporated or canceled; those not incorporated shall be recordedas outstandingin the sectionprovided. CHANGE SYMBOLS Revised text is indicated by a black vertical line in either margin of the page,adjacentto affectedtext, like the oneprinted next to this paragraph.The changesymbol identifies the addition of either new information, a changedprocedure,the correction of an error, or a rephrasingof the previous material. A changesymbol in the margin by the chapternumber and title indicates a new or completely revisedchapter.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES The following definitions apply to “WARNINGS,” “CAUTIONS,” and “Notes” found throughout the manual.

An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc.,which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed or followed.

An operatingprocedure,practice, or condition, etc.,whichmay result in damageto equipment if not carefully observed or followed. Note An operatingprocedure,practice, or condition,etc.,which is essential to emphasize. WORDING The conceptof word usageand intendedmeaning, which hasbeenadheredto in preparingthis manual, is as follows: “Shall” has been used only when application of a procedureis mandatory. “Should” has been used only when application of a procedureis recommended. “May” and “need not” have been used only when applicationof a procedureis optional. “Will” hasbeenusedonly to indicate futurity, never to indicateany degreeof requirementfor application of a procedure.

27 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

0%75PAA-1.3

PART I

Aircraft
Chapter I - Geneml Description Chapter 2 - System and Equipment Chapter 3 -Servicing Chapter 4 -Operating chaptct 5 -Armament Limits Limitations

29 (Reverse BlanW

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-XPAA-1.3

CHAPTER

1

General
1.1 THE AIRCRAFT

Description
17.Installed universal pylon wiring harnesses spanthe aircraft wing interior leading edgesand provide power and control signals to various wing station equipment pods. Equipmentbays 15, 17, 18, 19,42,43, and 44 have beenmodified to receive the new equipment suitesand patchpanels.Mission equipmentpower for many of the systemsis providedby themission circuit breakerpanel addedto the main electrical load center at bay 45 (see Figure 2-l). In some cases,existing power provisions have been modified to support the system upgrade. Modifications to specific stations are explained in the following paragraphs. 1.1.1.1 Flight Station. The flight station has been modified to accommodatean AN/ARC-1590 control unit, patchedsecureSATCOM, two PDI selectpanels, two PDIs and the LTN-72 INS. The AN/ARC-l 59(V) UHF 1 communications system, which replacesthe AN/ARC-5IA UHF 1 system, consistsof theR/T, control unit, andmount. The UHF 1 controlunit is locatedin the flight stationcenterconsole. The R/T and mount arelocated at bay 44. The antenna select control panel in the flight station selects the existing AT-256 upper and lower antennasfor use by UHF 1 and UHF 5. The AN/ARC-51A system 5-amp ac circuit breakersare replacedwith AN/ARC-l590 IO-ampdc circuit breakers.New circuit breakeridentification panelsare installed at the forward right-hand electronic rack circuit breaker panel. Additionally, patchedsecureSATCOM is now available on the pilot securehandset.The handsetoperateswith both UHF 1 and SATCOM. Selection of securevoice operationon UHF 1 and SATCOM for both the pilot and TACCO is performedon the TACCO AUX ICS control. The PDI and select panel are usedto monitor information from the AN/ALQ-170 system pods at WS 12 and 15.The PDI selectpanel is located at the pilot side consoleandat the copilot side console.The associated PDI indicatorsarelocatedon the pilot andcopilot glareshields,respectively. l-l ORIGINAL

The EP-3Jmodel aircraft is a P-3B aircraft modified to include command and control warfare systems.For P-3B specificinformation(e.g.,powerplants,dimensions, and general arrangement),seeNAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 and NAVAIROl-75PAC-1.1. 1.1.1 Mission Equipment Configuration. This information describes changes madeto the P-3B aircraft convertingit to an EP3J. Conversion to the EP-3J configuration includes modification of existing operatorstations and installation of additional mission-specific equipment. Moditied existing operatorstationsinclude the flight station, radio operatorstation, tactical evaluator (TAUEWO) station, sensor station 1 (CZWI), sensor station 2 (C2W2),radaroperator,andthe navigator(NAVEWO) station.The contigurationrequiredtheaddition of STATION 8A, a mission circuit breakerpanel, a 60 Hz converter, and a universal pylon wiring subsystem to supportwing storepatch panels(refer to Chapter2). The AN/AK-22 intercommunications system has been modified to accommodatesix UHF radios, one SATCOM radio, two dual audio modulators, two EA/ES radios,two HF radios,and an HF scanner. To comply with TEMPEST requirements,eachradio systemassociated with the C2W mission avionics suite and the very high frequency/ultrahighfrequencyradio system has been fitted with AGC-9 acoustical filters. Four additional AGC-9 KS adaptershave also been installed: one at C2W1, one at C2W2, and two at TAUEWO station. When a radio is keyed, the ICS adapters ensureICS audio routed to that station is disconnected. The NAV station hasbeendivided to createan additional position, designated asSTATION 8A. Wing store control units are located at STATION 8A and support the universalpylon wiring routedto outboardWS 9, 10, I1,16,17, and 18via the wing storespatchpanel at bay

NAVAIR

01.75PAA-1.3

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

D. E. F. G.

STATION 8A 1 NAVIEWO STATION TAC/EWO STATION C2W112 STATIONS

Figure l-2. OperatorStationArrangement(Sheet 1 of 8)

ORIGINAL

I-2

NAVAIR Ql-XPAA-1.3

__e-----_ / /’ --.

PILOT

PDI

,

-\

.

COPILOT

PDI

\ ‘\ I I I I ;

i i

FLIGHT STATION CONSOLES Figure l-2. OperatorStationArrangement(Sheet2 of 8) 13 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Cdl-75PAA.1.3

IN-FLIGHT

COMMUNICATOR

STATION

CONSOLE

Figure l-2. OperatorStationArrangement(Sheet3 of 8)

I-4

. . . . . L

NAVAIR

01-75PAA.1.3

.

L

RADAR OPERATOR

CONSOLE

Figure l-2. OperatorStation Arrangement(Sheet4 of 8)

1-5

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-I .3

................... ........................... ............................ I .......................... ............................ :: .......................... ........................... .......................... .......
................... .. ...................................................... ................

I ::

:

I I
e

STATION SACONSOLE

Figure 1-2. OperatorStationArrangement(Sheet5 of 8)

ORIGINAL

l-6

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

NAVIEWO STATION

CONSOLE

Figure 1-2. OperatorStation Arrangement(Sheet6 of 8)

1-7

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

II

H

TACIEWO STATION CONSOLE

Figure 1-2. OperatorStationArrangement(Sheet7 of 8)

ORIGINAL

l-8

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-I.3

IL

1. .

Jl
C2Wi12 STATIONS

Ll

Figure 1-2. OperatorStation Arrangement(Sheet8 of 8)

1-9

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Master ICS control unit wiring is modified to interface with the AN/AL.Q-170 system. NAV group ICS audio, as selectedon pilot and copilot masterICS controls, will connect that position’s MIC line to the voice annotation recorder contained in the ANIALQ-170 pod. 1.1.1.2 In-Flight Communicator Station. The INFLIGHT COMMUNICATOR consoleis modified to accommodatea WJ-8718A HF scanning receiver,an MD-1203 dual audiomodulator,two AN/ARC-l90 (HF 1 and 2) control units, and an AUX ICS control. The teletypewriter,its associated equipment,andtheHF system selectorhavebeenremoved. The WJ-8718A HF scanner,designated asHF 3, is a standalone receiverthat employs an independentactive HF blade antenna. WJ-8718A HF scanner audio is routed to the AN/AIC-22 ICS systemas HF 3. The IOamp dc HF-3 circuit breaker on the forward left electronics rack circuit breakerpanelis replacedby a 1 amp 115-Vat circuit breaker at the same location. The HF blade antenna is powered by a 1 amp 28-Vdc circuit breaker. The MD-1203 dual audio modulator is dedicatedto HF 1andHF 2 operation.Eachchannelofthe modulator is routedto an HF transmittervia the AUX ICS control unit. The transmit selectswitcheson the AUX ICS control unit allow the operatorto routevoice audio andkey lines, or MD-1203 audio and key lines to one or bofh transmittersindividually. The modulator is poweredby a 5-amp 115-Vat 400-Hz circuit breakeron the forward left electronicscircuit breakerpanel. HF 1 andHF 2 systemsare AN/ARC-l90 radio sets thatreplacethe AN/ARC-94 systems.Each systemconsists of a receiver/transmitter,control unit, mount, antenna coupler, lightning arrester,dummy load, and a shieldedtubeto coverthe transmissionline betweenthe couplerandthe lightning arrestor.Onesystemis located at bay 15and the other at bays 42 and43. AN/ARC-94 systemcircuit breakersarereplacedby a single IO-amp 3-phasecircuit breakerfor eachAN/ARC-l90 system. Both systems are connectedto the existing long wire antennas.An AUX ICS control unit was installed to expandtheAN/AIC-22 system,enablingtheoperatorto select voice operation or modulator key operation on selectivesystems(refer to Chapter6). 1.1.1.3 Command and Control Warfare Station (C2Wl and C2W2). C2Wl and C2W2 consolesrequiredstructmal modifications to accommodate thefour UHF control units, two ECM/ESM control processors, an audio modulator, an AUX ICS control, and a VHS VCR. Modification of C2W2 requiredremoval of the ORIGINAL l-10

data recorder.Master ICS control units, C-4162/AIC22, havereplacedthe ICS crew control units at C2Wl andC2W2. Both sensorstationssharean MD-1203 dual audio modulator for use with the AN/USQ-113 and communication radio systems. C2Wl consolehas an ANNSQ-113 ECM 1 control unit, an AUX ICS control unit, and two AN/ARC-l59 control units for UHF 3 and UHF 4. C2W2 consolehas an ANiUSQ-113 ECM 2 control unit, an AUX ICS control unit, and two AN/ARC-159 control units for UHF 5 andUHF 6 anda VHS VCR with remotecontrol. UHF 3 through UHF 6 systems are AN/ARC-l59 radio sets.Each system comprises an RT-1150 R/T, a C-9816 control unit, and an MT-4658 mount. UHF 3 through UHF 6 R/Ts and mounts are locatedat bay 17. AN/ARC-51A system circuit breakershave been removed and replaced with IO-amp dc circuit breakers. All systemsare connectedto AT-256 antennas. The AUX ICS control units at C2Wl and C2W2 consolesexpandfhe AN/AIC-22 system,enablingeach operatorto select voice operation for UHF 3 through UHF 6 andboth ANAJSQ-113 systemsaswell as MD1203 modulator key operation on UHF 3 and UHF 4 (C2Wl), and UHF 5 and UHF 6 (C2WZ). The MD-l 203modulator key is connected directly to ANKJSQ-113 control processors.The ANAJSQ-113 control unit provides modulated audio input to either system.The MD-1203 is poweredby a 5-amp 115-Vat 400-Hz circuit breaker on the mission circuit breaker panel. The VHS VCR is commercial equipment fhat provides training mission case storage for radar images obtainedby the radaroperator.The VHS recorderitself is located at C2W2 becauseof fhe lack of available spaceat the RADAR OPERATOR console.The VCR is operatedpredominantly in recordmode. Control and operationof the VCR unit shouldbe performedwith the remote control, also locatedat the C2W2 console. 1.1.1.4 Tactical Coordinator/Electronic Warfare Officer Station. The TACYEWO console is modified to accommodatethe ARC-159 UHF 2 control unit, an AUX ICS control unit, and the LTN-72 MSU and CDU for INS No. 1. Additionally, the ICS jacks havebeenrelocatedbeneaththe TAC/EWO worktable. The UHF 1 and UHF 2 systems are AN/ARC-l59 radio sets fhat replace the AN/ARC-51 systems. The system consistsof an RT- 1150R/T, a C-9816 control unit, and an MT-4658 mount. The R/T and mount are locatedin bay 44. UHF 1antennaselectionis performed

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

at the cockpit. The UHF 2 control unit is located at the TACXWO console. UHF 2 connects to a dedicated upperAT-256 antennalocatedat FS 684.UHF 2 system ac circuit breakersare replacedwith lo-amp dc circuit breakers.New circuit breakeridentification panelsam installedat the forward right electronicscircuit breaker pd. The LTN-72 MSU and CDU for INS No. 1 are located at the TAC/EWO station and interface with the IDC. The LTN-72 No. 2 system is a standalonesystem. The NAV unit and battery are installed on the floor of bay 44. The MSU, CDU, and IDC are located at the TAC/EWO station. Power is supplied horn two circuit breakers on the forward right electronicscircuit breaker panel.The NAV unit is connected to theexisting aircratl true airspeedand magnetic compasssystem. The AUX ICS control unit at the TAC/BWO console expands the AN/AIC-22 system, enabling the TAC/EWO to select voice operation for all six UHF systemsand both ECM systems.PatchedsecureSATCOM and UHF 1 are available on the TACXWO’s securehandset.Selectionof securevoice operationon SATCOM and UHF 1 for both the TAC/EWO and the pilot is performedon the TAC/EWO AUK ICS control. 1.1.1.5 Radar Operator Station. The RADAR OPERATOR consoleis modified to accommodatevariablePRF equipment.The equipment,asinstalled in the EPJJ, interfaceswith theAN/APS-80 radarsystemand consistsof the B2 control located at the RADAR OPERATOR STATION, and the B2 unit located at bay 11. The B* system control box selects either the normal AN/APSdO PRF of 390 to 420 pps or an alteredPRF. This is accomplished by routing the two required outputshorn the SN-234/APS-80synchronizerthrough

a relay in the B* unit. Therefore,no cable recontiguration is requiredduring flight. Cable provisions for the B* control arelocatedat the RADAR OPERATOR console and for the B* unit in bay 11.Twenty-eight Vdc is suppliedto the B2 system from the main load center,dc limiter bus. 1.1.1.6 Station EA. The STA 8A consolehas been two ALQ-170 control units, two v&o monitors, ARC: 1, 87 SATCOM R/T, power supply,KY-58 remotecontrol, and an AUK ICS control unit. The wing-store control units supportthe universal pylon wiriig routed to wing stations9, 10, 11, 16, 17, and 18via the wing storespatchpanel in bay 17. Bach ALQ-170 system consistsof an ALQ-170 (V) control indicator, a 9-inch video monitor, a PDI select panel,and a PDI indicator. Both pilot and copilot have a PDI select panel and indicator at their stations.The ALQ-170 system is supportedby the universal pylon wiring that is routed directly to inboardstations12 and 15. The following navigation instruments are also locatedat theNAV/EWO console:BDHI, TAS, altimeter, airspeedindicator,and OAT indicator. 1.1.1.7 Navigator/Electron(c Warfare Officer Station. TheNAV/EWO consolehasbeenmodified to accommodate the ARC-l 87 SATCOM Wr, power sup ply and associated KY-58 remotecontrol, andan AUK ICS control unit. The following navigator’sinstruments havebeenrelocatedbetweenFS 533andFS 560:BDHI, TAS, altimeter, airspeedindicator, and OAT indicator. An AUX ICS control unit hasbeeninstalled at theNAV consoleto expandthe AN/AIC-22 system.

l-11 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Of-75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 2

Systems
2.14 MISSION SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS

and Equipment
1. MAIN LOAD CENTER, MAJN DC BUS, DC LIMITER BUS, LIMITER NO. 1 2. MAIN LOAD CENTER, MAIN DC BUS, DC LIMITER BUS, LIMlTER NO. 2 3. MAlN LOAD CENTER, MAIN AC BUS A. The modified power distribution systemwill support the following systems: 1. AN/AK-22 intercommunication system 2. HF 1 and2, AN/ARC-l90 communicationsystems 3. HF 3, WJ-8718 scanningreceiver

The original P-3B powerdistribution systemhasbeen modified to accommodateEP31 mission-peculiarsystems. P-3B HF andUHF communication systemshave beenremovedand replacedwith new equipment. Additional circuit breakerpanelshavebeeninstalledat the MLC and bay 17. Primary aircraft busesare identified in Figure 246 with the associated bus code. Figure 2-47 provides a list of circuit breakersand associatedcircuit breaker panels. Each table provides information for eachcircuit breakerpanel and is structuredas follows: 1. Column 1 is titled “Circuit Breaker” and lists circuit breaker names as they appearon the circuit breakerpanel. 2. Column 2 is titled “Circuit Breaker Panel” and identities the circuit breakerpanelthat accommodatesthe associatedcircuit breaker. 3. Column 3 is titled “Bus Code” and showsthe bus code for each circuit breaker. Each bus code is defined in Figure 2-47. The bus defined is the sourceof power for the associated circuit breaker. 4. Column 4 is titled “SystemiWRA” and identifies the system or WRA powered by each circuit breaker.EP-3J mission-peculiarWRAs are identified by nomenclaturewhere possible. 2.15 PRIMARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM The majority ofmission-peculiar systemswill be supplied 115 Vat, 400 Hz and 28 Vdc from the mission power circuit breakerpanel. In somecases,the original systemcircuit breakershave beenmodified slightly to accommodatemission-peculiarequipment. The mission power circuit breakerpanel is supplied power from the following buses: 2-l

4. UHF 1 and UHF 2, AN/ARC-l59 radio sets 5. UHF 3, 4, 5, and 6, AN/ARC-l59 mission radio. sets 6. ANNSQ-113 systems 7. SATCOM, ARC-187 system 8. Wing stores,AN/ALQ-170 system 9. MD-1203 modulator No. 1 and No. 2 10. Wing-storepylons,WS9, 10, 11, 12, 15,16, 17,18 11. B* PRF equipment 12. LTN-72 No. 2 inertial navigation system. Power generation has not changed. Refer to NAVAIR 01-75PAA-2-29 for description,theoryof op eration,andtroubleshootingprocedures. 2.46 MISSION CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL The mission circuit breakerpanel (Figure 2-48) that providespower to the addedmission systemsis located ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

BUS CODE BUS A BUS B r MEAC

BUS NAME 1MAIN AC BUS A 1MAIN AC BUS B MONITORABLE I BUS ESSENTIAL AC

4. 400/60 Hz converter 5. PDI selectpanels 6. MD-1203 modulator No. 2 7. Wing stations9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 17,and 18 8. B2 system. 2.17 400/60 HZ CONVERTER

FFAC

~~&IGHT

ESSENTIALESSENTIAL DC

MDC MEDC EXT MDC FEDC r.nR APU ESS SEDC 60HZ

1MAIN DC BUS 1MONITORABLE EXTENSION I

MAIN DC BUS DC BUS DC BUS I I

FLIGHT ESSENTIAL ( APU ESSENTIAL

GROUND OPERATION

DC BUS DC BUS

(START ESSENTIAL I115 VAC 60HZ BUS

Figure 2-46. Electrical Bus Codes on the bay 45 door. Power distribution from the panel supportsall the wing stationpylons; UHF 3,4,5, and6; USQ-113 receivers 1 and 2; the 400/60 Hz converter; SATCOM and associated KY-58; MD-1203 modulator No. 2; the B* system, andthe PDI selectpanels for the ALQ-170 system. Circuit breakerson the mission circuit breakerpanel provide ac and dc power to the following EP-3J added systems: 1. UHF3,4,5,and6 2. USQ-113 No. 1 andNo. 2 3. ARC-187 SATCOM

The 400/60 Hz converter is located at bay 17 and provides 115-Vat, 60 Hz power to four standardwall receptacles in thecabin, allowing theuseof60 Hz equipment.Three-phase 115Vat, 400 Hz from the 400/60Hz converter30-amp circuit breaker at the mission power panelis provided to PlOl of the converter.115Vat, 60 Hz exits P102 through CB 1, 2, 3, and 4 at the 60 Hz circuit breakerpanellocatedat bay 17(Figure 2-49),and is applied to receptacles1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. Receptacle1 is locatedat theNAV station to power the ALQ-170 monitors; receptacle2, also at the NAV station, is used to power test and other associatedequip ment (laptop mission computer); receptacle3 is a GFI type located in the galley for use with test equipment; andreceptacle 4 is at C2Wl/C2W2 and is usedto power the VHS VCR. The 400/60 Hz converterprovides 1IS-Vat, 60 Hz power to the following locations, via the 60 Hz circuit breakerpanelat bay 17: 1. C2Wl/C2W2 receptacle 2. NAV station ALQ-I70 monitor receptacle 3. NAV station test equipmentreceptacle 4. Galley test equipmentreceptacle.

ORIGINAL

2-2

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Circuit

Breaker

Circuit MISSION

Breaker

Panel

Bus Code BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A

I

SystemMlRA WING STORES PYLON, STATION 9 WING STORES PYLON, STATION WING STORES PYLON, STATION WING STORES PYLON, STATION WING STORES PYLON, STATION WING STORES PYLON, STATION WING STORES PYLON, STATION WING STORES PYLON, STATION AN/USQ-113 AN/USQ-113 NO. 1 CONTROLLER NO. 1 RECEIVER EXCITER 10 11 12 15 16 17 16

WING STORES POSN 9 WING STORES
POSN IO

CB PANEL

MISSION CB PANEL MISSION MISSION MISSION CB PANEL CB PANEL CB PANEL

WING STORES POSN 1,l WING STORES POSN 12 WING STORES POSN 15 WING STORES POSN 16 WING STORES

MISSION CB PANEL MISSION MISSION MISSION MISSION CB PANEL CB PANEL CB PANEL CB PANEL

IPnsNl7 I
WING STORES POSN 16 USQ-113 NO. 1 CONTROL USQ-113 NO. 1 RECEIVER EXCTR

r r

USQ-113 NO. 1 HPA

MISSION 1MISSION

CB PANEL CB PANEL

BUS A 1BUS A BUS A

ANIUSQ-113 AMPLIFIER 1ANIUSQ-I

NO. 1 HIGH-POWER

1USQ-113 NO. 2 1CONTROL USQ-113 NO. 2 RECEIVER EXCTR USQ-113 NO. 2 HPA

13 NO. 2 CONTROLLER EXCITER

MISSION CB PANEL

ANlUSQ NO. 2 RECEIVER

MISSION MISSION

CB PANEL CB PANEL CB PANEL

BUS A BUS A BUS A BUS A MDC LIMITER MDC LIMITER MDC LIMITER MDC LIMITER MDC LIMITER

AN/USQ-113 AMPLIFIER

NO. 2 HIGH-POWER

1PP-201 POWER SUPPLY (ARC-167) MD-1203 NO. 2 MODULATOR 400/60 HZ STATIC FREQUENCY CONVERTER WING STORES PYLON, STATION 9 NO. 1 WING STORES PYLON, STATION NO. 1 WING STORES PYLON, STATION NO. 1 NO. 1 NO. 1 WING STORES PYLON, STATION 12 C-11508/ALQ-170 NO. 1 CONTROLLER WING STORES PYLON, STATION 15 C-11508/ALQ-170 NO. 2 CONTROLLER 11 10

MD-1203 NO. 2

MISSION

60 HZ
WING STORES POSN 9 DC WING STORES POSN 10 DC WING STORES POSN 11 DC WING STORES POSN 12 DC WING STORES POSN 15 DC

MISSION CB PANEL MISSION CB PANEL MISSION CB PANEL MISSION CB PANEL MISSION MISSION CB PANEL CB PANEL

Figure 2-47. Circuit Breakers(Sheet 1 of 3) 2-3 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

WING STORES PYLON

LIMITER NO. 1

LIMITER NO. 2

TEST EQUIP, NAV TEST EQUIP, GALLEY TEST EQUIP, VCR

60 HZ CB PANEL 60 HZ CB PANEL 60 HZ CB PANEL

400/60 HZ
CONVERTER

115 VAC, 60 HZ RECEPTACLE NAVIEWO 115 VAC, 60 HZ RECEPTACLE GALLEY 115 VAC, 60 HZ RECEPTACLE VHS VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER .MlBSlON STORES CB PANEL, WING SSI,

400/60 HZ
CONVERTER

400/60 HZ
CONVERTER CB CB CB BUS A BUS A MEDC

WING STORES PWR RELAY ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES AIC-22 ICS

FWD LEFT ARMAMENT PANEL FWD LEFT ARMAMENT PANEL FWD LEFT ARMAMENT PANEL

WING STORES, PWR REIAY RADOP AUX ICS (TBl9-A6) NAV AUX ICS (TB32-810) TAClEWO AUX ICS (TB16A16) SSI AUX ICS (TB431-D23) SS2 AUX ICS (TB431-D23) C-98161ARC-159 RT-1 lSO/ARC-159 PP-7095/ARC-159

COMMUNICATION NO. 1 UHF-l

FWD RIGHT ELECTRONIC CB PANEL

MEDC

Figure 2-47. Circuit

Breakers(Sheet2 of 3)

ORIGINAL

2-4

NAVAIR

Of-75PM-1.3

I

Circuit

Breaker

Circuit

Breaker

Panel

Bus Codf

SystemlWRA

I

SECURITY

UNIT HF

MONITORABLE ESSENTIAL DC BUS PANEL

MEDC

KY-75 RCU Ill A Z-AKS

I

WJ-8718 PREAMP FWD LEFT ELECTRONICS CB PANEL FWD RIGHT ELECTRONICS CB PANEL FWD RIGHT ELECTRONICS CB PANEL BUS A BUS A BUS A WJ-8718 HF SCANNING LTN-72 NO. 2 INU LTN-72 NO. 2 INU RECEIVER

I

Figure 2-47. Circuit Breakers (Sheet 3 of 3)

Figure 248.

Mission Circuit Breaker Panel

2-5

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

Figure 2-49. 60 Hz Circuit BreakerPanel

ORIGINAL

2-6

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

3

Servicing
3.4.10 Pod Radiation Areas Note During groundoperationof anypods,ensure the areais clear of all personnel.The anticollision lights shall be turnedon by pulling the strobecircuit breaker(F5) on extensionmain dc to allow both the top and bottom lights to operate.The taxi lights shall also be turned on by activating the taxi light switch on the exterior light control panel.Resetthe circuit breakerand deactivatethe switch after pod checksare complete.

The electronic warfare pods carried by the EP3J may radiateharmful radiation to a distanceof 60 feetfor personnel.The possibility of fuel or ordnanceignition also exists with RF radiation.Fuel trucks, fueling operations, or HERO susceptibleordnancewithin 200 feet of an operatingactive emitter pod may constitutea hazard.

3-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR

0%75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 4

Operating
4.12 STORE LIMITATIONS

Limitations
1 WARNING
l

This portion of Chapter4 is provided to give the EW crewmembera readyreferencefor the type of storesthat may be carriedaboardthe P-3 aircraft, for loading information,refer to the applicableEP3J loading manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-75). Only the externaland internal storeslisted in Figure 4-6 may be carried (singly or in combination) to the limits shown.

1

Master arm power shall not be activated on the ground with stores loaded on the aircraft.

a Searchpower shall not be activatedonthe ground with stores loaded except for maintenancechecks,operationalchecks, orpreflight checksby qualified operators.

4-1

ORIGINAL

I
STORE AN/ALQ-170 ALQ-167 ALQ-167 ALQ-167 ALQ-167 ALQ-167 ALE-43 VARIANT ANY G/I B/C D E/F J FULL

AST-6

1 ANY

1. LBA. POD MUST HAVE FAIRINGS KIAS. 2. ACCELERATION LIMITATIONS:

INSTALLED

OR INDICATED

AIRSPEED

IS RESTRICTED

TO 300

MAX -

3.OG, MIN -

OG, FOR ALL PODS.

3. STATIONS 9,10,11.16, 17, AND 16 ARE MISSION STATIONS, STATIONS 12, 13,14. AND 15 ARE FERRY STATIONS ONLY BECAUSE OF PROP ARC INTERFERENCE WITH THE RADIATED SIGNALS. 4. DISPENSING ACCELERATION l.OG MAXIMUM.

Figure 4-6. External and Internal Stores Carried on P-3A AircraR

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

01.XPAA-1.3

CHAPTER

5

Armament
Contained

Limitations
in NAVAIR Ol-75PAG1

5-l (Reverse

Blank)

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

PART II

Indoctrination
Containedin PJA/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAL Chapter6 -Training and Qualifications Ol-75PAG1).

31 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 61-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 6

Training and Qualifications
6.1 INTRODUCTION A continuous training progmm will ensurea high degreeof readinessfor all flight personnel. 6.4.3 Tactical Crew Complement. To effectively carry out an EW training mission, EPJJ tactical crews shouldbe composedofthe following EW mission qualitied personnel: 1. Pilot 2. Copilot 3. Third pilot 4. TACIEWO 5. NAViEWO 6. Flight engineer,secondflight engineer 7. In-flight communicator 2. Currentinstrumentrating for all naval aviatorsand instrumentqualification for NFOS. 3. Designatedin writing by the squadroncommanding officer. Mission commanderqualification requirementsshall be as follows: 1. Completion of ail requirementsfor EP-3J aircraft commanderor TACZWO. 8. C2Wl operator,C2W2 operator 9. Radaroperator 10. In-flight technician/portaft 11. Starboardat?observer. 6.6 QUALIFICATION, CURRENCY, AND REQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

6-l (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01 -ISMA-1.3

PART III

Normal

Procedures

Containedin P-3A/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1). Chapter7 -Normal Procedures (General) Chapter8 -Normal Procedures (Flight Stations) Chapter9 - Functional Checkflight Procedures

33 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

7

Normal

Procedures

(General)

Containedin NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

7-I (Reverse

Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol -75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 8

Normal Procedures

(Flight Stations)

Containedin NAVAIR Ol -75PAC-1

8-l (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 9

Functional

Checkflight
Contained in NAVAIR

Procedures

0 I -75PAC- 1

9-l (Reverse

Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA4.3

PART IV

Flight Characteristics
Containedin P3AWC NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1). Chapter 10-Flight Characteristics

35 (ReverseBlank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

10

Flight Characteristics
Contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

IO-I (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

r--~~~~~~---~rr---r.---r.----r.-------l NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3 I \ I

PART V

\ I I

Emergency

Procedures

Chapter 11 -Annunciator Lights Chapter 12-Emergency Procedures (General) Chapter13 -Ground Emergencies Chapter 14 -Takeoff Emergencies Chapter 15 -In-flight Emergencies Chapter 16-Approach and Landing Emergencies Chapter17 -Emergency Equipment

I

37 (Reverse Blank)

---

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

11

Annunciator
Chtained in NAVAIR

Lights
Oi-75PAC-1

--=--=-

<

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

12

Emergency

Procedures

(General)

This chanteraddresses ditchine andbailout oroceduresas affectedbv the addition of Station 8A. For generalemer- I 12.8 DITCHING The original ditching stationsfor P-3B aircraft have beenmaintainedfor theEP-3Jandanadditionalditching station (STA 8A) has been establishedadjacent to the NAV/EWO station. Refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 andNAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1.1 and Figures 12-9and 1210for ditching stationassignments andFigure 12-l 1 for specific duties. 12.9 BAILOUT Refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 and NAVAIR Ol75PAC-1.1 andFigure 12-11. 12.10 SMOKE OR ELECTRICAL FUMES OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN Generalproceduresfound in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 andNAVAIROl-75PAC-1.1. RefertoFigure 12-l 1 for EP3J specific duties.
FLIGHT ESCAPE STATION HATCH I ;;;T;02;S I STARBOARD EMERGENCJ I OVERWING EXIT HATCH STSD AFT 06s - STA 15

l

Remove personnel overcome by smoke/fumesfrom sceneoftire beforeadministering oxygen. Keep oxygenbottles away from sceneof tire. All crewmembersshall wear flight gloves during electrical tire or fuselagefire of unknown origin.

l

TACIEWO-STA

10

EXIT

HATCH

Figure 12-9. Crew Stations 12-1
.--

---w-----

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

C R E N 0 N B 0 A R D

21JxJxJxJxIx(xIxJxJ 1 NOTES: 1. ALL PERSONNEL 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

x 8A

1x1 9

x IO 1,

) Xl 12

x
13

1x1 14

x 15 16

(xl
17

x 16

1x1
19

x
20

BOARD NO. 2 LIFERAFT WITH SEVEN OR LESS. WILL BOARD NO. 2 DITCHING STATION. NORMALLY

2. ALL PERSONNEL ASSIGNED BY PLACARD TO BOARD NO. 3 LIFERAFT LIFERAFT WITH 10 OR LESS. 3. OFF-DUTY PILOT/FLIGHT ENGINEER SHALL HAVE READILY AVAILABLE

4. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS CONFIGURED WITH TWO 12-MAN LIFERAFTS, PERSONNEL ASSIGNED TO THE NO. 3 LIFERAFT WILL BOARD THE NO. 2 LIFERAFT. 5. WHEN CARRYING 20 OR 21 TOTAL PERSONNEL, DOUBLED UP AT STATIONS 18 AND 8. PASSENGERS

19 AND 20 SHALL BE

8. PASSENGERS 19 AND 20 SHALL BOARD LIFERAFT 3 AND 2 RESPECTIVELY. IN THE EVENT OF A BAILOUT, THEY SHALL UTILIZE PARACHUTES 19 AND 20. IN THE EVENT OF A FIRE OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN, THEY SHALL ASSIST AS DIRECTED. TAKE WATER BREAKER BY SON0 STORAGE SHALL PERFORM PERFORMS RADAR’S DUTIES. RACK.

NORMAL RESPONSIBILITIES.

Figure.12-10. Priority ofDitching Station Assignments

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.:

DITCHING

BAILOUT PILOT-STATION 1

FIRE

BILL

. Warn Crew: “Prepare to Ditch,” time to impact; jettison bomb load; turn search power off; adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness. !. Check crew evacuation: exit through overhead hatch or over wing on port side; board No. 1 liferaft.

1. Give sianal for bailout preparation verbally and by four short rings on the command bell. 2. Receive acknowledgment assigned jumpmaster. from

3. Reduce airspeed if possible. 4. Depressurize aircraft and trim slightly nose down. 5. Head aircraft toward uninhabited area and engage autopilot. If over water, or uninhabited area, establish port turn and engage autopilot. 6. Give signal to bail out verbally and by one long ring on the command bell. 7. Deploy crash recorder/locator prior to leaving flight station. 8. Put on parachute and bail out through main cabin door.
L

COPILOT Announce intention to ditch and time to impact over PA system using ICS override. !. Set IFF to emergency; establish voice communication if possible; secure loose equipment; and adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness. I. Exit through overhead hatch or over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferafl.

- STATION

2

1. Set IFF to emergency; establish voice communication if possible. 2. Assist pilot as directed. 3. Put on parachute and bail out through main cabin door when directed.

F IGHT ENGINEER-STATION Adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness. !. Depressurize: Dump compressors, close aux vent and outflow valve. I. Exit overwing hatch on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft. (Open overhead hatch only if deemed necessary for egress.)

3 Inspect forward electrical load center. Be prepared to pull applicable circuit breakers as required, report progress to pilot.

I. Acknowledge bailout preparation signal (verbal or four short rings on command bell). 2. Depressurize: Dump compressors, open outflow valve, close aux vent. 3. Put on parachute and bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Figure 12-I 1. Crew EmergencyResponsibilities(Sheet 1 of 5)

12-3

ORIGINA

NAVAIR

Ul-73k’AA-1.3

DITCHING IN-FLIGHT

BAILOUT COMMUtJICATOR - STATION 4

FIRE BILL

1. Send position reports and distress signals. 2. Adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness. 3. After impact, assist in passing gear out hatch; take any accessible parachute; exit over wing port side; board No.1 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), send position reports and distress signals, 2. Put on parachute and when prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Sail out through main cabin door when directed.
FORWARD OBSERVER - STATION

Remain at station; check behind dust cover above radio operator and forward armament interconnection box via access door; be prepared to transmit emergency message and aircraft position when directed by pilot.

STARBOARD

5

1. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness. 2. After impact, take water breaker from head; exit over wing on starboard side: board No. 2 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Sail out lhrough main cabin door when directed.
OBSERVER

As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

STARBOARD

FORWARD

DECK STATION - STATIONS

6 and 20

1. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Station 6: Assist in launching No. 2 liferaff; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft. 3. Station 20: Assist in launching NO. 3 liferaft; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

PORT FORWARD

OBSERVER

DECK STATION -STATION

7

1. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Assist as required; exit over wing on port side; board No. 1 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

Figure 12-l 1. Crew EmergencyResponsibilities(Sheet2 of 5)

ORIGINAL

12-4

BAILOUT RADAR OPERATOR - STATION 8 1. Over water, give bearing and 1. Over water, give bearing and distance to nearest ship or closest distance to nearest ship or point of land. closest point of land. 2. Secure loose equipment, take 2. When prepared to bail out, ditching station and adjust seatbelt. assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Afler impact, take port water breaker and first-aid kit; exit over wing on 3. Bail out through main cabin door port side; board No. 1 liferaft. when directed.

DITCHING

I

FIRE BILL If possible, give bearing and distance to nearest ship or closest point of land. Inspect all forward left-hand electronic bays, head and forward radar cabinet and be prepared to pull circuit breakers on applicable circuit breaker panels as required. Obtain the forward fire bottle. Report progress to TACIEWO. As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

1. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft.

1. Check position and give to IFC and copilot on paper; take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Assist TAClEWO as required; take maps, reports, GPS receiver and battery; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft. 1. Secure loose equipment; take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Direct evacuation of crew and survival equipment. Take starboard water breaker; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

STATION 8A 1. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 2. Bail out through main cabin door when directed. NAVlEWO - STATION 9 1. Check position and give to IFC and copilot on paper. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed. TAClEWO - STATION 10 1. Inspect and report crew ready to bail out. If time permits, ensure liferafts are launched. 2. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

I I
I !

Remain at station: obtain aircraft position, draft emergency message and pass to IFC and copilot on paper; assist TAClEWO as required.

Direct crew efforts in locating and fighting fire. Direct remaining crew with unassigned duties to assist as required (obtain oxygen bottles, take messages to flight station, etc.). Continuously report progress and results to flight station.

c2
1. Secure loose equipment. 2. Turn on starboard overwing exit light. 3. Take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 4. After stop, jettison starboard overwing hatch, launch No. 3 liferaft; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

‘1 OPERATOR

- STATION

11

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), turn on starboard overwing emergency exit light. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Activate starboard overwing exit light. Inspect all forward right-hand electronic bays, main electrical load center, areas behind pull-away dust covers beneath tactical station and areas behind cover panels located below C2Wl and C2W2. Be prepared to pull circuit breakers on applicable circuit breaker panels as required. Rewrt progress to TACIEWO:

Figure 12-11. Crew EmergencyResponsibilities(Sheet3 of 5)

NAVAIR

01-75PAA-1.3

DITCHING

BAILOUT C2W2 OPERATOR - STATION 12

FIRE BILL

1. Secure loose equipment. 2. Turn on port overwing exit light. 3. Take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 4. After stop, jettison port overwing hatch, launch No. 1 liferafl; exit over wing on port side; board No. 1 liferafl.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), turn on starboard overwing emergency exit light. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Activate port overwing exit light. Obtain fire extinguisher at sonobuoy stowage rack; inspect electronic bays 17, 18 and 19 and the hydraulic service center; Be prepared to to pull circuit breakers on applicable circuit breaker panels as required. Report progress to TACIEWO.

STATIONS
1. Secure loose equipment. Take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Stations 13 and 18: Assist as required; exit over wing on port side; board No. 1 liferafl. 3. Station 19: Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

13,18,

AND 19
As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

IN-FLIGHT

TECHNICIAN/PORT

AFT OBSERVER

- STATION

14
as required.

1. Secure loose equipment. Take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Take galley liquid container and aft first-aid kit; exit over wing on the starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Assist TAClEWO

STARBOARD
1. Secure loose equipment, turn on main cabin door emergency exit light, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. 2. Launch No. 2 liferaft; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft.

AFT OBSERVER

- STATION

15
Activate main cabin door emergency exit light. Inspect aft lefl electronic bays, emp deice timer motor and relays, ASH-20 (if installed), top strobe power supply, and Doppler well. Be prepared to pull circuit breakers on applicable circuit breaker panels. Obtain aft fire bottle. Report progress to TACIEWO.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Figure 12-11. Crew EmergencyResponsibilities(Sheet4 of 5)

12-6

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

DITCHING INBOARD I. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. !. Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side: board No. 3 liferaft.

BAILOUT GALLEY SEAT - STATION 16

FIRE BILL

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed. OUTBOARD

As assigned or directed by PPC/mission commander.

GALLEY SEAT - STATION 17 As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

I. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt. !. Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side: board No. 3 liferafl.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute. 2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door. 3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Note In the event the fire bill is activated and the starboard aft observer position is vacant, the IFT will assume the starboard aft observer duties. If the C2Wl positi on is vacant, either the off-duty pilot or radar operator will assume the C2Wl duties. If the C2W2 position is vacant, either the off-duty pilot or IFT will assume the C2W2 duties.

Figure 12-l 1. Crew EmergencyResponsibilities(Sheet5 of 5)

12-7 (Reverse

Blank)

ORIGINAL

-----~-~---------------~-~~-~~~~---.

.\\\\~\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 13

Ground Emergencies
Containedin NAVAIR 0I-75PAC- 1 andNAVAIR Ol-75PAC 1.1

irn\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\\\\\\~\~\
NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

14

Takeoff Emergencies
Containedin NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

14-1 (Reverse

Blank)

CHAPTER

15

In-Flight Emergencies
Contained in NAVAIR Ol-‘ISPAC-I

~\\~~\~L\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\m\\\\~ NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

16 I

Approach

and Landing Emergencies
Containedin NAVAIR OI-7SPAC-I

\ I

CHAPTER

17

Emergency

Equipment

ContainedinNAVAIR Ol-75PAC-I

17-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

PART VI

All-Weather

Operation

Containedin P-3AEK NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAG1). Chapter 18- All-Weather Operation

39 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

18

All-Weather

Operation

Containedin NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

18-i (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

PART VII

Communication

Procedures

Containedin P-3A/EK NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1). Chapter 19 -Communication Procedures Chapter20 -Communication Equipment

41 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

19

Communication
19.1 COMMUNICATIONS The EP-3Jaircrafihasa highly refinedcommunication system that provides for communicationsin voice and CW. It is mandatorythat everycrewmemberunderstand thecommunicationsystemthoroughlyto effectivelyutilize the high degreeof flexibility designed into the EP-3J aircraft.To effectivelyoperate the communicationsystem in coordiited operations,the pilots, tactical/electronic warfareofficer,andin-flight communicatormustbefamiliar with the currentcommunicationplans,op orders,optasks, and commanders’ intentions. Specific fleet communicationinsfrnctions andtechniques arecontained in wing communicationplans. Note A detailed description of all EP-3J aircraft radioand navigationelectronic equipmentis locatedin this part and Part VIII. 19.2.1.1 Message Releasing Authority. The responsibility for all transmissionsrestswith the mission commander(or thepilot in command if no mission commander is assigned).The mission commander should inform the IFCO, pilot, and other crewmembers who may be called on to conduct external communications as to what transmissionsare permissible without spe-

Procedures
cific authority. He should normally sight and release messages for transmission. The message releasing authority may be delegatedto other officers in the crew and is encouraged when conditions require the full attention of thepilot (if mission commander)to safely fly the aircraft, suchas during low-level tactical, night, instrument,or turbulent-weather operations.The mission commandershouldbe awareof all outgoing messages. 19.3 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS 19.3.1 Voice. The EP-3J carries six ARC-159 UHF transceivers, one ARC-182 VHF/UHF transceiver, two VOR receivers, two ARC-190 SSB-HF transceivers, oneWJ-87 18A scanreceiver,one ARC-l 87 SATCOM and two MD-1203AJLT audio modulators. Should all master control boxes become inoperative becauseof complete failure of the AK-22 intercom, both HFs can be operated by plugging in a microphoneandearphones directly. 19.3.2 CW. The two ARC-190 SSB-HF transceivers are available for communications in the CW mode of operation.Monitoring of the CW circuit is the responsibility of the in-flight communicator. Messagestransmitted on this system must be releasedin accordance with paragraph19.2.1.1.

19-l

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

01-75PAk1.3

UHF-2 (FS 664) ECM-1 RCV ANTENNA AS4242iUSQ113(v) (FS 567.5) SATCOM UHF-3 (FS 366). UHF-115 (FS 299) (FS 496) I I ECM-2 RCV ANTENNA AS4242/US&113(v) (f% 777.5)

I

UHF-6 (FS 1182)

I
ECM-1 LOW BAND XMIT ANTENNA AS-4243/U%-1 13(V) (FS 723, LBL 34)

I

UHF-5/l

(FS 1101)

UHF-4 (FS 1010)

ECM-2 HIGH BAND XMIT ANTENNA AS-4244/USQ-113(V) (FS 691.5, LBL 32)

ECM-2 LOW BAND XMIT ANTENNA AS4243/USQ-11301) (FS 691.5, RBL 32) HF.3 RCV (FS 212) ECM-1 HIGH BAND XMITANTENNA AS-4244/USQ-113(V) (FS 723, RBL 34)

Figure 19-1. Antenna Locations

ORIGINAL

19-2

NAVAIR 0%‘ISPAA-1.3

CHAPTER 20

Communication

Equipment

Containedin NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

20-l (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

01.?JPAA-1.3

PART VIII

Mission Systems
Chapter 21 -Mission Chapter 22 -Mission Chapter 23 -Flight Systems Overview Equipment Station Systems

43 (Rewse Blanhj

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER

21

Mission Systems Overview
Contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

21-l (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER

22

Mission Equipment
22.1 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AK-22 AND AUXILIARY ICS CONTROL The AIC-22 intercommunication (intercom) system in the EP-3Jaircraft is essentiallythe sameas that in the P-3B. The AIC-22 in the EPJJ has been augmented with anAUK ICS control unit expandingthe operators’ communicationcapabilitiesbeyondwhat is availableon the AN/AIC-22 system.Each expandedposition hasan AIC-22 mastercontrol box and an AUK ICS box. Each AUX ICS control unit is identical and interchangeable. The AK!-22 ICS enables crewmembersto communicate with eachotherandto selectthe varioustransmittersand receivers.In addition, the AUK ICS control unit interfacesthe C?CM mission peculiar equipmentandoperator stationsto the AIC-22 ICS system. The AUK ICS control unit expandsthe AIC-22 system to accommodateaudioand transmit control accessto C2W systems. The interphonesystem, through severallevels of control, provides flexible, convenient intercommunications, radio monitoring, and where applicable, transmitter control to 14 flightcrew stations (15 with AFC 373 incorporated)and 2 groundcrewstations.DC electrical power for the ICS is supplied from the monitorableessentialdc bus through the AN/AIC-22 circuit breaker on the forward let? electronic circuit breaker panel. The various interphone components and functions are describedin the following paragraphs. 22.1.1 Components Description 22.1.2 Master ICS Control Panel. Mastercontrol panels (Figure 22-l) are located at the pilot, copilot, radio operator,navigator, and tactical coordinatorstations. Each of these boxes provides a multiplicity of control functions. 22.1.3 Microphone Selector Switch. The MIC SEL switch connectsthe station microphone, keying device, and headsetto the selectedinterphoneor radio transmitter-receivercircuit. Note When the MIC SEL switch is placed in eitherHF position on any masterICS control, keying the microphone will not key the transmitter unlessVO is selectedfor that transmitter on the Cl 176/AGC-9HF switch selectorpanel. The radio operator, who has primary control, should be consultedbefore using HF-1 or HF-2. The pilot and copilot have direct control over frequencyselectionand operationof VHF and UHF-I transmitters.When using the UHF-2 transmitter,thepilot or copilot should advise the TAUEWO of desiredfrequencyand type of operation. 22.1.4 ICS SEL Switch. The ICS SEL switch connects the stationto the desiredICS line. The switching selections available to the various stations are determined by the individual station tactical and operational requirements.Therefore, the master control boxes are interchangeable except for the ICS SEL control knob andpanel markings. 22.1.5 SPEAKER PHONES Switch. The SPEAKER PHONES toggle switch in the SPEAKER position parallels the station loudspeakerwith the headset. The exceptionto this is the NAV/EWO station.Becausethere is no loudspeaker assigned to the NAV/ EWO, the SPEAKER PHONES switch is inoperative.

22.1.1.1 Mike Smoke Mask-Normal Switch Panels. ThreeICS MIKE SMOKE MASK-NORMAL switchesareprovided in the flight station.One each is locatedon thepilot andcopilot side consoles,anda third below the flight engineer ICS control box. These switchescontrol the microphone installed in the smoke masks.With the ICS MIKE SMOKE MASK position, the smoke mask microphoneis connected to the associatedjack box; in the caseof the pilot and copilot positions, it is connectedto the ICS mastercontrol paneland the selectedinterphoneor radio transceivercircuit.

22-1

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Note When ALT has been selectedon one pilot KS panel, care should be taken to prevent the selectionof DISC at the otherpilot panel. If this situation exists, no other incoming calls can be heardby either pilot. 22.1.7 Disconnect Switch. The disconnectswitch in the DISC position disconnectsthe station from ICS to allow uninterruptedradio communications.Override operation of sufficient priority by anotherstation will bypassthis function. 22.1.8 Override Switch. The ORIDE switch at the pilot or copilot stationmay beusedto contactall stations in theaircrafi exceptthe wheelwells andmad boom. The TAC/EWO overrideswitch may be usedto overrideany disconnectsexceptpilot or copilot. The override function is not operablefrom any other station. 22.1.9 Radio Monitor Switches. Eleven toggle switcheson the mastercontrol panelsareusedto allow monitoring of the various radio and audio circuits in the aircraft. One of the switches is three-positioned,center OUT, to make it possibleto monitor a total of 12circuits with the 11 switches. The AUX position of the threeposition switch connectsit to the audio circuit selected by the master control AUX RCVR selectorat the ICS interconnectionbox. The 11remaining receiveror audio circuits are the ADF, VOR-1, tacanBCN (marker beacon), UHF-l, UHF-2, VHFNOR-2, HF-1, I-IF-2, and I-IF-3 (if installed). 22.1.10 Crew Control Panel. Crewcontrolpanels arelocatedat the following stations:flight engineer, stbd fwd obs, RADAR (2 ICS control panels if AFC 373 is incorporated),C2Wl and 2, port and stbd aft obs and galley. Functions of thesepanels are describedin the following paragraphs. 22.1.11 ICS SEL Switch. The ICS SEL switch connectsthe stationto the desiredICS line. The switch selections available to the various stations are determined by the individual stationtactical andoperational requirements. Therefore, the crew control boxes are interchangeable except for the ICS SEL control knobs and panel markings. 22.1.12 Receiver Select Switches. The RECEIVER SEL switches allow crew monitoring of the various receiversin the aircraft. A three-positionswitch connects the station to either UHF-l or UHF-2. The centerswitch is connectedto the VHF receiverline. The AUX toggle switch connects the station to the radio circuit selectedby the crew control switch at the ICS

Figure 22-l. MasterICS Control Unit C416YAlC-22 22.1.6 Alternate Switch. The alternateswitch (placardedACT) is provided to supply a sourceof audio in the eventof a headset amplifier failure. The pilot switch, when placed in the ALT position, connects the pilot headset to thecopilot headsetamplifier. Similarly, when the copilot switch is placed in the ALT position, it connectshis headset to thepilot headset amplifier. All audio selectedon the ICS panel of theheadsetamplifier being utilized is heardin bothheadsets. The TAC/EWO, NAV/ EWO, IFC and STBD FWD OBS are also respective alternatestations. ORIGINAL 22-2

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

interconnection box. Eight receivers are available throughthis auxiliary switching method. 22.1.13 Volume Control. Operating the volume control determines the volume of incoming intercom calls andreceiver signals.The radio volume is automatically reducedapproximately 10dBs when an indicium call is directed to or from the respectivestation. The volume level is automatically restoredon completion of the intercom call. 22.1.14 ICS lnterconnectlon Box. TheICSinterconnectionbox, located in the forward left electronic rack, provides interconnectionbetween the radio receiver outputsand the various ICS stations.Two rotary selectorswitches are provided to allow operationalselection of the various receivers for connection to the AUX line for selection with the AUX toggle switches of the ICS stations.The crew control can connectany one of eight different receiversto the AUX line for the crew ICS control stations. Also provided by the ICS interconnectionbox are screwdriver adjustable audio level potentiometersfor controlling thelevel of receiver audio from eachof severalaudio sources.SPARE positions on the selector switches and SPARE level adjust potentiometersareunused. 22.1.15 Universal Jack Box. Each ICS station is provided with a universal jack box to adapt the ICS systemto the useof 99-U headsetsand dynamic boom microphones or standardheadsetsand M-92/U handheld microphones. An additional universal jack box is provided. It is controlled by the TACIEWO’s master control box and located on the main electrical load center. 22.1.16 Service Jack Box. Servicejack boxes are installed at the groundcrew positions, nose wheelwell and tail boom. 22.1.17 Loud Speakers. One speakeris installed at the pilot, copilot and IFC station, two at the TACiEWO station and one in the galley. Each speaker consistsof isolation amplifier muting circuitry, an output level control, a PA level control, and the associated speaker.Access to the three adjustmentsis gained by removing the small cover on the face of the assembly. Note Three potentiometers are used to control volume level in eachloudspeaker. They are adjusted by maintenance personnel and should not be changedby flightcrew except when absolutelynecessary. The speaker volume control is used to adjust for normal speaker volume with the SPEAKER

PHONE switch in the SPEAKER position. PA volume is usedto adjust normal speaker volume when using the speakersas a public address system.Muted volume is usedto adjust for properattenuationof speaker volume when the microphoneis keyedat thatstation. Adjustments are made for useof a dynamic microphone; use of a carbon microphone will necessitate readjustment. 22.1.18 ICS Extensions. A universaljack box locatedon the main electrical load centeris connectedin parallelwith the TAC/EWO stationandis equipped with a &foot cord andpreamplifier. This remoteposition is controlledby the TACiEWO ICS control panel. 22.1.19 Intercommunication Functions

22.1.19.1 Fixed Group Lines. Sevenof the intercommunication groups are interconnectedso that all stationsin a group will receive calls addressed to that groupregardless of the receiving circuits selectedat the stations.Individual stations can defeat this featureby selectingtheDISC position ofthe ICS disconnectswitch on the master ICS control panel. The ICS SEL switch on masterICS control panelsis usedto selectthe group desired(Figure 22-2). The groups and stationsselected by the ICS SEL switch positions are describedin the following paragraphs. 1. PA (all stations except nose wheelwells and tail boom) - The PA line is available to either the pilot or copilot and permits the pilot or copilot to call everyspeakerandeveryheadsetin the aircraft regardless of local station switch selection. He/she,however, cannot call the nose wheelwell or tail boom stations. 2. ALL - The ALL line is availableto all ICS stations, including the groundcrewstations.Any call addressed to this line will be received by every stationexceptthoseusing the disconnectfunction. The pilot or copilot can call every station by selecting ALL and ORIDE simultaneously regardless of any receiving station disconnect switch setting. Groundcrew stations are always on the ALL line. 3. ASW - Radar,NAViEWO,TAC/EWO,C2Wl and 2 and stbdaft observer. 4. FLT CREW Pilot, copilot, flight engineer.

5. OBSER GROUP - Stbd fwd observer,stbd aft observer,port aft observer,galley.

ORIGINAL

UAVAIR Qi-75PAA-1.3 -

2

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

s 3 iz P
NOSE L’VHEELWELL PILOT COPILOT FLIGHT ENGINEER INFLT COMM STBD FWD OBS RADAR OPERATOR” -

1 5 4 d I( 3

; 3 ( ( ( : : -

‘:

_ _ ) c _ c _ _ c -) : 1 _ n _ )I : _ x N _ x _ 1 : _ : _ : ) _ .

i 5 3 3

d” z -3 0 0 0

i { E -8 E E -

p

1 % ii - -ZE D D D D D D D cxs cxs X xs X X X X xs X X X xs -

,”

0 0 0 X

0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

-

E -

NAVIEWO TAC/EWO

-

0 0 X X X

-

3 3 3 3 -I

STBD AFT OBS PORT AFT OBS GALLEY TAIL BOOM

-

Figure22-2. Interconnection LineGrouping

224

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

6. NAV - Pilot, Copilot, NAV/EWO, EWO, in-flight communicator.

TACI

7. COORD - Pilot, TAC/EWO (this line is available only to the pilot and TAC/EWO). 22.1.19.2 Conference Lines. Two conference lines, CONFERENCE 1 and 2, are available to all flightcrew stations to permit optional grouping of any desiredstations. 22.1.20 COMMAND BELL. The command bell providesa meansof notifying the aircraftcrewmembers to preparefor bailout (four short rings) and to bail out (one long ring). An immediate ditching situation shall be signaledby onelong ring only and a PA call. Power is suppliedfrom the 28-volt flight essentialdc bus throughthe COMMAND BELL circuit breakerlocatedon the forward electrical load center. Three command bells are located overhead in the forward observer,radar stationand galley areas. 22.1.20.1 COMMAND BELL Switch. The COMMAND BELL switch is located in the center of the exteriorlights control panel in the flight station.This is a momentary-type switch that connectspower to the threebells when pushed. 22.2 AUXILIARY ICS SYSTEM 22.2.1 Auxiliary ICS Control Functional Description. The AUX ICS control units (AUX ICS) are located at NAV/EWO station, TAC/EWO station, C2W1, C2W2 andradio operatorstation (Figure 22-3). There are C4162/AIC-22 master ICS control units (Figure22-l) at eachexpanded position. Therearethree MX-18280/AGC-9 ICS adapterunits at TAC/EWO station, one at C2Wl and one at C2W2, to maintain TEMPEST requirementswhen the master ICS control unit is selected. All AUX ICS units areidentical andinterchangeable. The functions available on the AUX ICS control unit, however, are configured specifically for the intended mission of the equipment at any one position. For an explanationofthe AUX ICS control unit functions,Figures 22-4 and 22-5. The AUX ICS interfaceswith the master ICS control unit’s PTT and MIC audio lines. When the MIC SEL toggle switch on theAUX ICS unit is setto MAIN, PTT and MIC audio lines are routedto themasterICS control unit, allowing selectionof radios on the AIC-22 system.

When the MIC SEL toggle switch is set to AUX, PTT, and MIC audio lines are routed to the functions available on the AUX ICS control unit. The function select toggle switches on the AUX ICS control unit allow certain C2W systems to use voice operationor MD-1203 dual modulatorkey operation.At radiooperator, NAV and TAC/EWO at all times and at C2Wl and C2W2 in the AUX mode, receive audio from the selectedreceivercanbe routedto left(L) or right(R) audio channelusing the L e--, R toggle switchesfor that receiver.AUX ICS audio is thenroutedto the AM-3364 jack box. The ability to switch MAIN ICS audio to the L andR audiochannelsis providedat TACZWO, NAV, and RO stations.The AUX ICS control unit alsoallows either modulatorto be routedto UHF 3 through6, ECM 1and 2, or HF 1and 2 (dependingon station)andselects the KY-58 and associatedradio for the handsetlocated at TAC/EWO station. 22.2.2 Component Description. Function select switches on the AUX ICS control provide audio and transmit control accessto the following EP3J added systems: 1. UHF3,4,5,and6 2. USQ 113ECM/ESM 1 and 2 3. SATCOM ARC-187 System 4. HF 1 andHF2 5. V/UHF 6. MD- 1203modulators 7. KY-58 securecommunication. 22.2.3 Auxlllary ICS Control Operatlng Procedures 22.2.3.1 ICS. Functions associated with the AIC-22 ICS include the following: 1. MAIN ICS - Selectsleft (L) or right (R) audio channelfor monitoring AIC-22 ICS audio. 2. MIC SEL - Routes microphone and transmit control to eitherMAIN (masterICS) or AUX (auxiliary control unit). 3. VOL LEFT - Adjusts volume of headsetleft earphone. Controls audio from masterICS control and other selectedaudio sourceson the AUX ICS control unit.

22-5

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%TSPAA-I .3

RI

WA I WA

Figure 22-3. AUX ICS SystemLocation 4. VOL RIGHT - Adjusts volume ofheadsetright earphone. Controls audio from masterICS control andother selectedaudio sourceson the AUX ICS control unit. 22.2.3.2 UHF. Functionsassociated with UHF radios include the following: 1. RX LEFT w RIGHT - Six 3-position toggle switches.Centerposition OFF. Selectsleft (L) or right (R) audio channelon headsetto monitor selectedUHF radio (UHF 1 tbroughUHF 6). 2. TX - Four 3-position toggle switches, select transmit source for UHF radio (UHF 3,4,5, and 6). Center position OFF. Up (MIC) routes station microphone audio and transmit control signalsto associatedUHF radio (UHF 3,4, 5, or 6). Down routesMD-1203 modulator audioandkey to associated UHF radio (UHF 3,4,5, or 6). Note Selecting MIC doesnot automatically route receive audio. The appropriate UHF RX switch (3,4,5, or 6) must be selectedL or R to complete the two-way path. 22.2.3.3 HF. Functionsassociated with HF radios include the following: 1. RX LEFT C, RIGHT - Three 3-position toggle switches. Centerposition OFF. Selectsleft (L) or right (R ) audio on headsetto monitor selected I-IF radio (HF 1,2, or 3). 2. TX - Two 3-position toggle switches select transmitsowe for I-IFradio(HF 1and2). Up (MIC) routesstationmicrophoneaudio andtransmit control signals to associatedHF radio (I-IF I or 2). Down routes MD-1203 modulator audio and key to associatedHF radio (HF 1 or 2). Note SelectingMIC doesnot automatically route receive audio. The appropriate HF RX switch (1 or 2) must be selectedL or R to complete the two-way path. 22.2.3.4 V/UHF. Functions associatedwith V/UHF radios include the following: 1. RX L/R - One 3-position toggle switch. Center position is OFF. Selectsleft Q or right (R) audio channelon headset to monitorV/UHF (ARC-I 82). 2. TX - One 2-position toggle switch. Routes V/UHF microphone and transmit control from source.Down position is OFF. Up (MIC) routes stationmicrophoneandtmnsmit contml to V/UHF. Note SelectingMIC does not automatically mute receiveaudio.The ViUHF RX switch must be sekctedL or R to completethetwo-way path. 22.2.3.5 SATCOM. Functions associated with SATCOM include the following: 1. RX L/R - One 3-position toggle switch. Center position is OFF. Selectsleft(L) or right (R) audio channelon headsetto monitor SATCOM audio. 2. TX - One 2-position toggle switch that routes SATCOM microphone and transmit control from source. Down position is OFF. Up (MIC) routes stationmicrophone and transmit control to SATCOM. Note Selecting MIC does not automatically route receive audio. The SATCOM RX switch must be selectedL or R to completethe twoway path.

ORIGINAL

22-6

NAVAIR

01.75PAA-1.3

.......................................... .............................

....

.......

.......................................... ...........................

.............................. .............................

.........................................................

...........................................

AUXILIARY

ICS CONTROL

BOX

IFC AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

Figure.22-4. AUX ICS System(Sheet 1 of 3) 22.2.3.6 ECMIESM. Functions associated with ECM/J?SM include the following: 1. RX L/R - Two 3-position toggleswitches.Center position is OFF. Selects left (L) or right (R) audio channel on headsetto monitor associated control (ECM l/ESM or ECM 2). 2. ECM 1iESM - One 2-position toggle switch routesECM I RX or ESM RX to ECM I (USQ113)or ESM (not used).Always set to ECM 1. 3. TX - Two 2-position toggle switches. Down position is OFF. Up (MIC) position routesstation

30030018

microphone and transmit control to associated ECM (ECM 1 or ECM 2).
Note

SelectingMIC does not automatically route receive audio. The ECM 1 or ECM 2 RX switch(es) must be selectedL or R to complete the two-way path.
22.2.3.7 MD-1203 Dual Modulator. Functions associated with the modulator include the following:

1. AUDIO L/R - One 3-position toggle switch. Spring loaded to OFF (center position). Routes
ORIGINAL

22-7

UAVAIR 01.XPAA-1.3

36636616 TACIEWO AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

30030017 NAV/EWO AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

Figure 22-4. AUK ICS System(Sheet2 of 3) modulator audio to station earphonesto check modulator in headsetwithout keying radio. 22.2.3.8 HANDSET. Functions associated with handsetinclude the following: 1. PILOT UHF - One t-position toggle switch. Up (PILOT) routes pilot’s handset to UHF 1 KY-58. 2. SATCOM - Down (SATCOM) routes pilot’s handsetto SATCOM. 3. TAC/EWO UHF 1 - One 2-position toggle switch. Up (TACIEWO) routes TAC/EWO’s handsetto UHF 1 KY-58. 4. SATCOM - Down (SATCOM) TACIEWO’s handsetto SATCOM. routes

22.3 AN/ARC-1SOM HF RADIO SET. HF 1 and HF 2 systemsareAN/ARC-l 90 radio sets.Each system comprises an RT-1341 Wr, a C-10828 control unit, an MT-6142A mount, a CU-2275 antenna coupler, a 1916-01 lightning arrester, a dummy load, and a shieldedtube to cover the transmissionline betweenthe coupler andthe lightning arrestor. One systemis located

ORIGINAL

22-a

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

KS system. An F-1629/AGC-9 acoustical filter installed on the MIC audio line of both HF 1 and HF 2 attenuates low-level signals (300 to 3500 Hz). The I-IF 1 andHF 2 radio systemsoperateidentically in plain HF communication mode.

@I
12 3

@
4 5 6 @t

22.3.1 Receiver/Transmitter RT-1341(V)3/ARC190(V). The R/T transmits andreceiveson any one of 280,000frequenciesspacedat lOO-Hzincrements.Frequenciesare derived from a temperaturecompensated crystal oscillator and digital-frequencysynthesizer. The receiversectionusesdual conversionwith crystal bandpassfilters to decrease effects from strong interference signals.Operatingmodes, frequency,volume, squelch, andpresetchannelaremicroprocessor-controlled by inputs from the radio setcontrol. In transmit, the radio set is capableof delivering 400 watts peak-envelope power or 400 watts averagepower with a continuousduty cycle. Power amplifier circuits areautomaticallyprotected from overload, short circuit, and overheat by built-in protectioncircuits. The receiverandtransmitterareboth automaticallytunedto the samefrequency.The receiver is tunedby the fast-lock synthesizerin 10 milliseconds or less. Typically, the transmitter tunes to a manually selectedfrequencyin 1 secondand to a presetchannel frequency in 35 milliseconds. One conventional tune cycle is required for the system to learn the code for a presetchannel frequency. 22.3.2 Control Panel C-10828(V)2/ARC-190. The radio setcontrol hassix operatingmodes:UV, LV, UD, LD, AM, and CW. The 280,000 frequenciesand six operating modes are selected by the C10828(V)2/ARC-190(V) radio set control. The control also contains a seven-step volume and three-step squelchcontrol and a self-test switch and system fault indicator lights (seeFigures 22-6 and22-7). Tuningand operationinformation is transmittedto the RfI through serial ASCII control words at RS-422 signal levels and a 9,600baudrate. 22.3.3 Antenna. Each HF system uses one longwire antenna.The antennasare attachedbetween the vertical tin and the fuselage. Maintenance on the HF antennasshould be performed using instructions contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-2-27. 22.3.4 Antenna Coupler CW2275(V)2/ARC190(V). The antennacouplerconsistsoftwo basic case structures:a sealedcontrol compartment,and a pressurized tuner assembly.The tuner assemblyis pressurized at 8 to 9 poundsper squareinch using dry nitrogen.This prevents possible arcing at high altitude, provides a cooling medium, and preventscorrosive elementsfrom

30030012

C2WI and 2 OPERATORS

AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

Figure 22-4. AUX ICS System (Sheet3 of 3) at bay 15 and the other at bay 42. Both systemsconnect to long wire antennas. The AN/ARC-190(V) HF radio set incorporates SIMOP lockout relays and RC timedelay circuits to prevent both transmitters from being keyed at the sametime. When HF 1 or HF 2 is keyed, the RC time delay will not permit the radio to transmit for approximately30 milliseconds. This allows the coax relay of the oppositesystem time to actuateand connect thecouplerto a dummy load. Two MMT33H transformers (Tl for I-IF 1 and T2 for HF 2), provide impedance matching betweenthe 150-ohmaudio ports for tbe RT1341(V)3/ARC-190(V) RfT and the 600-ohm AIC-22

22-9

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

Of-75PAA-1.3

SECTION/SWITCH UHF

SWITCH FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION RX LEFT- - RIGHT toggle switches for UHF I through 6 enable operator to switch receive audio from left to rtght audio channels for the radio selected. TX MICMD-1203 toggle switches for UHF 3 through 6 enable operator to select voice operation or modulator key operation for the radio selected. All witches have a center OFF position.

HF

Rx LEFT- - RIGHT toggle switches for HF 1 through 3 enable operator to witch receive audio from left to rfght audio channels for selected AN/ARC-l90 radio set (HF IRlF 2) or HF scanner (HF 3). TX MIC/MD-1203 toggle witches for HF 1 and 2 enable operator to select voice operation or modulator key operation for the radio selected. Both switches have a center OFF position.

V/UHF

Rx L- - R toggle switch for V/UHF enables operator to switch receive audio from left to rfght audio channels for the AN/ARC-l82 radii sat. TX MlClOFF toggle switch for V/UHF radii set enables operator to select voke operation or set TX to OFF.

SATCOM

Rx L- - R toggle switch for SATCOM enables operator to switch receive audio from left to right audio channels for the ARC 187 radioset. TX MIC/OFF toggle switch for SATCOM radio set enables operator to select voice operation or set TX to OFF.

ECMIESM

RXL-R toggle switches for ECM 1 and 2 enable operator to switch receive audio from lefl to right audio channels for selected ANNSQ-113 radio set. TX MIC/OFF toggle switches for ECM 1 and 2 enable operator to select voice operation or set TX to OFF.

HANDSET L/R MAIN ICS L/R MD-1203 AUDIO ECM I/ESM MIC SEL MAIN/AUX VOL LEFT VOL RIGHT

UHF l/SATCOM toggle switches for pilot and TACiEWO enable operators to select secure communication for either UHF 1 or SATCOM. Enables operator to switch MAIN ICS audio from let? to right audio channels for the selected radio, on the AIC-22 system. Enables operator to monitor left and right audio from the MD-1203 modulator. ESM selection has been provided, but is not connected. Enables operator to select AIC-22 system or AUX ICS functions. Controls left audio channel volume. Controls dght audio channel volume.

Figure 22-5. Auxiliary ICS Control Box Controls andIndicators enteringthe unit. Microprocessordevicesdigitally tune the couplerto provide impedancematchingbetweenthe RR and long-wire antennathat allows maximum power transfer. The coupler uses no mechanical components (motors, variable coils, or capacitors)eliminating the need for periodic maintenance.The digital impedance matching network is made up of fixed coils and capacitars selectedby high-voltage vacuum relays. This a)lows frequenciesto be selectedat very high speed.
22.3.5

Controls and Indicators. Refer to Figures 22-6 and 22-7.
Component

ORIGINAL

22.10

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

6. PTT - Initiate antennacoupler tuning by momentarily pressing the microphone push-to-talk button. 7. SQL - Rotate SQL control clockwise until receivernoisejust disappears. Figure22-6. C-lO828(V)2/ARC-19o(v)Control Panel 22.3.6 AN/ARC-19OM Operating Procedures 22.3.6.3 ARC-190 Emergency Operation. HF-1 must be maintained(for safety of flight) because ofbus load monitoring/shedding. 22.4 CA-33 AN/ARC-159 UHF The AN/ARC-159 communication systemis a solid-state UHF R/T that providestwo-way, amplitude-modulated, doublesidebmd, likanicr mdiocommunicatiot~ FachsystemcomprisesanRT-llSOR/T,aC-9816controlunit,and anMT4658 mount.Systemcomponents arelocated atbays 17and44tiththesssociatedcontrolunitslocatcdatSS1,SS2, TACEWO, andthetlight station.Systemsare connected to AT-256 antennas. The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on any of 7,000 frequencies,spaced25 kHz apart in the 225.000to 399.975MHz frequencyrange.The radio is capableof guard frequencyreceptionand ADF reception. The guardreceivermodule is a self-containedtixtuned receiver set to 243.000 MHz and can operate simultaneously with the main receiver. During ADF reception, the radio receives RF signals from the DF antennaand routesthe demodulatedlow frequencies to the DF amplifier. Any one of 20 presetfrequenciesor any oneof the 7,000frequencieswithin the rangeof the radio may be selected. Six AN/ARC-l59 radio systems are installed in the EP-3J. UHF 1 C-9816/ARC-159 control, located at the flight station, has secure voice capability and the ADF function. UHF 2 control is located at the TAC/EWO station, with the four mission UHF controls at SSl and SS2. The TAC/EWO selects secure voice capability for pilot and TAClEWO secure handset operation on the AUX ICS. The TAC/EWO has transmit and receive capability on all six UHF radios. Pilot, copilot, radio operator, and navigator have transmit and receive capability on UHF 1 and UHF 2. SSl and SS2 have transmit capability on UHF radios 3 through 6 and receive capability on all six UHF radios. UHF 1 and UHF 2 RT-I 150 RiTs are located on shelves 3 and 4 at bay 44, with mission systems UHF 3,4,5, and 6 at bay 17. Refer to Chapter 1 for UHF system component location. The mission radios function as communication sets and are capable of being modulated by the .aft MD-1203 modulator.

22.3.6.1 Discrete Frequency Operation 1. TARE CMIYOFF - Switch to the TARE CMD position. ON indicator will illuminate indicating power has beenapplied. 2. FREQ - Use the six frequency select thumbwheel switches to select the desired frequency,if necessary. 3. MODE - Position MODE thumbwheel switch up or down to cycle betweenUV, LV, UD, LD, AM, or CW. 4. SQL RotateSQL contmllily counterclockwise.

5. VOL - Adjust VOL control for comfortablelistening level. 6. PTT - Initiate antennacoupler tuning by momentarily pressing the microphone push-to-talk button. 7. SQL - Rotate SQL control clockwise until receiver noisejust disappears. 22.3.6.2 Preset Operation 1. TAKE CMDlOFF - Switch to theTARE CMD position. ON indicator will illuminate indicating power hasbeenapplied. 2. MODE - Position MODE select thumbwheel switch to P (preset). 3. CHAN - Position the two CHAN select thumbwheelswitchesto the desiredpresetchannel. 4. SQL RotateSQLcontroliIrllycot&erclcckv&e.

5. VOL - Adjust VOL control for comfortablelistening level.

22-11

ORIGiNAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CONTROL CHAN MODE Two thumbwheel frequency data. Thumbwheel

FUNCTION switches that select 30 channels (00 through 29) for preset mode and

switch that selects the following modes: W - Upper sideband voice UD - Upper sideband data AM - Amplitude modulation

LV - Lower sideband voice LD - Lower sideband data CW r ;~s;tu~~~wave 1 Undefined (CONT FAULT indicator will illuminate when in this mode)

FREQ

Six thumbwheel switches that select 290,000 frequency channels spaced at IOO-Hz increments from 2.0000 to 29.9999 MHz. (Selection below 2.0000 MHz will cause a CONT FAULT indication.) Indicator that illuminates when radio set power is turned on. Spring-loaded, momentary-action switch that turns radio set on or off.

ON TAKE CMDIOFF TAKE CMD LOAD

Indicator that illuminates when the radio set control takes command. Momentary-action pushbutton switch that causes mode and frequency data to be stored in the RIT preset channel memory when pressed. Data is stored in the memory location indicated by the preset CHAN switches. Momentary-action pushbutton switch that initiates self-test cycle. When pressed, all FAULT indicators illuminate and initiates receive self-test cycle. When released, all FAULT indicators are extinguished. If test fails, one FAULT indicator remains illuminated to indicate location of fault. ARer pressing TEST pushbutton, the next time the microphone PTT switch is pressed, a transmit self-test cycle is initiated. If test fails, one FAULT indicator will be illuminated. A four-position switch that selects squelch threshold level. Disabled when in the fully counterclockwise position. Indicator that illuminates when a malfunction occurs in antenna coupler. when pressed in. In the

TEST

SQL CPLR FAULT DSSL

Alternate-action pushbutton switch that disables squelch threshold out position, squelch threshold level is selected by SQL switch. Indicator that illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the Rff.

KLT VOL CONT FAULT An eight-position switch that sets the R/T audio level.

Indicator that illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the control panel, FREQ switches are set below 2.0000 MHz, CHAN switches are set to an unloaded preset channel, the MODE switch is set to P, or the MODE switch is set to A.

Figure 22-7. C-10828(V)2/ARC-190Control Panel Controls and Indicators

ORIGINAL

22-12

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

22.4.1 Component Description. Figure 22-8 lists the systemcomponentsby quantity, nomenclature,part number,and location. 22.4.2 RT-1150/ARC-159 Receiver/Transmitter. The R/T provides transmission and reception of AM signals in tbe frequency range of 225.000 MHz to 399.975MHz. The m provides normal voice and AM secure voice simplex communications.Additional capabilities include the following: 1. Continuousguard frequencymonitoring. 2. Reception of UHF ADF signals on any selected frequency. 3. Transmission of signals 6om a referencesignal generatoron a preselectedfrequency. 4. Transmissionof an internally generated1020Hz toneon any selectedfrequency. 5. In guard channelprecedence and when activated by an externalcontrol, the RT-1150 can be turned on and tunedto the guard frequency. 22.4.3 MT-4658/ARC-159 Mount. The MT-4658 mount is a nonconnectorized mount that holds the RT1150 R/T, securedby bullets at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All R/T interface is wired directly to the connectors,stowed at the rear of the mount. 22.4.3.1 C-9816/ARC-159 Control. The UHF 1 control unit is a multifunction controllerthat permits the operator to select READ, PRESET, MANUAL, and GUARD frequency operation and selects associated R/Ts for communication or navigation operation.The C-9816/ARC-159 UHF 1 control unit is located in the centerpedestalof the cockpit. 22.4.4 Component Controls and Indicators. All controlsandindicators areon the C-9816.Refer to Figures22-9 and 22-10. 22.4.5 Power Distribution 22.4.5.1 UHF 1. The IO-amp COMMUNICATION UHF-l circuit breakeris located on the forward right electronics circuit breaker panel. When the circuit breakeris closed,28-Vdc power is appliedto the UHF 1 radio set control and the PP-7095power supply.When theUHF ANT RELAY 5-ampcircuit breakeris closed, 28Vdc power is applied to RE-219/ARR-40 antenna relay No. 1.

22.4.5.2 UHF 2. The IO-ampCOMMUNICATION UHF-2 circuit breaker is located on the fotward right electronics circuit breaker panel. When the circuit breaker is closed, 28-Vdc power is applied directly to RT-ll5O/ARC-159No.2andtoC-9816/ARC-l59control No. 2 at the TAC/EWO station. 22.4.5.3 Mission UHF 3,4,5, and 6. Power distribution for each mission UHF radio is identical with the exception of connector designationsand terminal numbers.Example provided is UHF 3. When the 7.5amp MISSION RADIOS UHF NO. 3 circuit breaker located at the mission circuit breaker panel is closed, 28-Vdc power is applied to the C-9816/ARC-159 control and to RT-1150/ARC-159 systems 3, 4, 5, or 6. UHF-3 throughUHF-6 operationandcontrol aresimilar to UHF-l (except for UHF-I secure voice capabilities). Functions and operations are covered in paragraph 22.5. 22.4.6 Component DescriptionlSwitchology 22.4.6.1 AN/ARC-l59 UHF Operation. Operation of UHF 3, UHF 4, UHF 5, andUHF 6 radio setsinclude preset operation and manual operation. The UHF 2 through 6 radio sets are configured for CLEAR voice transmissiononly. 22.4.6.2 Preset Operation. Switchology required for presetoperationis listed below: 1. VOL - Set to full clockwise. Readjust as required after establishingradio communications. 2. SQ - Set to OFF for maximum reception. Reset to SQ position after establishing radio communications. 3. BRT Set to full clockwise position.

Readjust asrequiredduring low-light conditions. 1. MODE Set to MAIN position.

2. CHANSEL - SetrotarycontroltoPRESETposition. Push and releasepushbuttonuntil desired presetchannelnumber is displayed. 22.4.6.3 Manual Operation. Switchology quired for manual operationis listed below: re-

1. VOL - Set to full clockwise. Readjust as required after establishingradio communications.

22-13

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

eceiver/Transmitter

RT-1150/ARC-159 MT-4658/ARC-159

AT-256AJARC

Figure 22-8. RT-115O/ARC-159List of Components

ORIGINAL

2244

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

22.4.6.7 Guard Frequency Operation. The preset knob andmanual frequencyselectorsareineffective when the mode selectoris in the GUARD position. 1. VOL - Readjust as required after establishing radio communications. 2. SQ - Set to OFF for maximum reception. Reset to SQ position after establishing radio communications. 3. BRT - Set to full clockwise position. Readjust asrequiredduring low-light conditions. 4. MODE Set to GD position.

Figure 22-9. C-9816/ARC-159 2. SQ - Set to OFF for maximum reception. Reset to SQ position after establishing radio communications. 3. BRT - Set to full clockwise position. Readjust as requiredduring low-light conditions. 4. MODE Set to MAIN position.

22.4.6.8 Tone. The TONE pushbutton,, when pressed,causesthe transmitter to transmit a 1020~Hz tone signal. 1. PresstheTONE button. 2. Remove pressurefrom the TONE pushbuttonto end TONE transmission. 22.5 AN/ARC-187 SATCOM SYSTEM @WITHSECURE VOICE) The AN/ARC- 187SATCOM systemprovidesplainvoice communicationsin both SAT and LOS modesof operation.The SATCOM radio is interfacedwith a KY58 to provide securevoice and data communicationsin SAT andLOS modes.In plain voice operation,the radio is controlled through the aircraft ICS system by selecting SATCOM MIC and L or R RX on the AUX ICS control. Plain voice SATCOM may be selected by either the TAC/EWO or navigator. During securevoice operations,the ARC-187 receive and transmit audio and PTT are accomplished through one of the two red handsets(locatedbetweenthe TACiEWO andnavigator stations or in the cockpit above the pilot station). The handsetis selectedon the AUX ICS control at the TAC/EWO stationsto provide secureSATCOM operation to either the pilot or TAC/EWO. The TAC/EWO controls the SATCOM system in SECURE mode. The componentsof the AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM systeminclude the following: 1. DM C34-3/B antenna 2. DM H26-90” hybrid coupler 3. TSECKY-58 encryption unit.

5. CHAN SEL - Set rotary control to MNL position. Use toggle switchesbelow display to select desiredfrequency. 22.4.6.4 CLEAR Voice. Press and hold microphone PTT switch while speaking into the headset microphone. 22.4.6.5 Load Preset Frequencies. frequenciesas follows: 1. SetMODE switch to BOTH. 2. Turn BRT control fully clockwise. 3. SetCHAN SEL switch to PRESET. PressCHAN SEL button to select desired preset channel number (1 through20). 4. Set CHAN SEL switch to MNL. Using toggle switchesbelow display window, selectdesiredfrequency225.000to 399.975. 5. PressLOAD button. 6. Repeatsteps3,4, and 5 to load all desiredpreset channels. 22.4.6.6 Squelch. Squelchis enabledwhen the SQ switch is set to the SQ position. Squelch is disabled when the SQ switch is setto the OFF position. Note The GUARD position of the mode selector shall not be used, exceptin emergencies. 22-15 Load preset

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CONTROL MODE

FUNCTION OFF - Controls power to radio. MAIN - UHF communication only. BOTH -UHF communication and guard. ADF - Enables DF mode. Selects preset channels. Selects guard frequency. Enables manual frequency select controls. Enables preset channel selection. Displays selected channel frequency. Loads preset frequencies into memory. Transmits a 1020 Hz tone. squelch circuits. indicator shows (888.888).

CHAN SEL GD MNL PRESET RD LOAD TONE SQ OFF TEST BRT VOL Frequency Readout Buttons

Enable/disable Test frequency

Controls intensity of frequency readout. Controls radio receive volume. Permits control of the underscored digits in the frequency readout.

Figure 22-10. C-9816/ARC-159(V) Controls 22.51 Component Description 22.5.1.1 RT-1402AIG AN/ARC-187. The R/T installed in the EP-3J aircraft is a UHF FM R/T that provides two-way communications over the frequency range of 225.000 MHz to 399.995 MHz. Plain voice communications are provided in both SAT and LOS modes. Transmitter power is adjustable from 1 to 35 watts in SAT mode and 1 to 2 watts in LOS mode. All controls for system operation are located on the front panel.The PP-201power supply is mountedon the rear of theRT-1402A/G. A separate SATCOM power on-off switch is mounted besidethe R/T at theNAV station. 22.5.1.2 DM C34-3/B Antenna and DM H28-1 90” Hybrid Coupler. The DM C34-3/B antennaand DM H26-90° hybrid coupler (with phase-matched RF cables) are located on the overheadat FS 496 and FS 510, respectively.The high-power hybrid coupler provides the antenna with a 90” phase differential to achieve circular polarization. 22.5.1.3 T-SEC/KY-58 Encryption Unit. The TSEC/KY-58 encryptionunit is physically mountedon the top shelf of bay 43. The KY-58 Z-AHP RCU is mounted on the console at the NAV station (Figures 22-11and 22-12). 22.5.2 Controls and Indicators. 22-13 and 22-14. Refer to Figures

22.5.3 AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM System Operating Procedures. SATCOM system operation includes setting frequencypresetsand offsets, as well as setting the radio for CLEAR voice transmissionand SECURE voice transmission. AN/pSC-3 SATCOM systemoperatingmodes include: 1. CLEAR voice, SATCOM 2. SECURE voice, SATCOM 3. CLEAR voice, LOS 4. SECURE voice, LOS. 22.5.3.1 Preset Loading 22.5.3.1.1 Initial Control Settings. as follows: 1. SQUELCH 2. VOLUME 3. Display OFF. OFF. Midrange. Set controls

ORIGINAL

22-18

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

Figure.22-12. KY-58 RemoteControl Unit Note The uplink frequency hasbeenset, a downlink frequency has not been set, and no offset established. Figure 22-11. KY-58 Security Unit 4. SAT OFFSET 5. CALL RCV. OFF. Any position. 22.5.3.1.3 Downlink Frequency Set (Receive). SettbedownlinkkquezxyforSATOFFSETAasfol~ 1. FUNCTION 2. MODE Xl. A. SAT.

6. FUNCTION 7. MODE 8. POWER -

Any position. Any position.

3. SAT OFFSET 4. CALL -

SEND (hold in position). Note

22.5.3.1.2 Uplink Frequency Set (Transmit). Set theuplink frequencyfor SAT OFFSET A as follows: 1. FUNCTION 2. MODE X2. A. SAT.

Frequencydisplay will indicate a kquency between 225.000 h4Hz and 399.995 MHz (last presetused)or 000.000(currentuplink presetfrequencyis invalid). 5. Set desireddownlink frequencyusing h4HZ and KHZ controls while holding CALL control in SEND position. 6. ReleaseCALL control and ensureit returnsto the RCV position. (This returns the,radio to normal operation.) Note
l

3. SATOFFSET 4. CALL -

SEND (hold in position). Note

Frequencydisplay will indicate a frequency between 225.000 MHz and 399.995 MHz (last presetused)or 000.000 (currentuplink pressfrequencyis invalid). 5. SetdesireduplinkkquencyusingMHZandKHZ controls while holding CALL control in SEND position. 6. ReleaseCALL control and ensureit returnsto the RCV position. (This returns the radio to normal operation.)

At this point, both uplink and downlink frequencies have been set and position SAT OFFSET A hasbeenestablished. To preset SAT OFFSET positions B, C, andD, repeatuplink and downlink pmcedureswith SAT OFFSET control in the desiredposition.

l

22-17

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%TSPAA-1.3

Figure 22-13. RT-1402A/G ARC-187 SATCOM System Controls and Indicators 22.5.3.1.4 Review Preset Frequencies. controls as follows: 1. MODE Xl. A. Set the uplink (transmit) presetfor SAT OFFSET A hasbeencleared. 4. ReleaseCALL control and ensurethat it returnsto RCV position. 5. Verify frequencyis clearedbyholding CALL control in SEND position and observing 000.000 on frequencydisplay. Note When CALL control is released, the tiequencydisplay will be blank. 22.5.3.2 Transmit/Receive Mode

2. SATOFFSET -

Note The frequency display shows the uplink (transmit) frequencyfor SAT OFFSET A. 3. CALL RESET (hold in position). Note . Frequency display shows the downlink (receive) frequency for SAT OFFSET A. The downlink frequency is shown as follows: . DOWNLMK FREQ is equalto the uplink frequency minus SAT OFFSET associatedwith selectedSAT OFFSET position.
l

22.5.3.2.1 Initial Control Settings. For plain voice transmit and receive operations,set the controls as follows: 1. FUNCTION operation). 2. MODE SAT OR LOS (for desired

To review SAT OFFSET frequenciesB, C, and D, set SAT OFFSET control to desiredposition and repeatstep3. Set

VOICE. OFF. Adjust as desired. CW until audio mutes. MIC. L or R as desired.

3. SQUELCH 4. VOLUME 5. SQUELCH -

22.5.3.1.5 Clearing Preset Frequencies. the controls as follows: 1. MODE X2. A.

6. AUX ICS SATCOM TX 7. AUX ICS SATCOM RX Note

2. SAT OFFSET 3. CALL -

RESET (hold in position).

Note Within 2 to 4 secondsthe frequencydisplay changes to 000.000, indicating that the ORIGINAL 22-18

SATCOM may be selectedat either TAC/ EWO or NAV stations. 8. FrequencyMHZ KHZ To desired frequency.

NAVAIR

0%TSPAA-1.3

CONTROL MODE Control :: 3. ; 6: 7. ii RXMT ;z[TE

FUNCTION

8.
SEL CAL Indicator CALL Control

Selects interface with TSECIKY-65. Selects interface with TSECKY-57/S& - Retransmit operation. - Handset plain voice ~omm++ions, - Call mode that works In conJuncbon vvlth CALL control. DATA 300 - Selects interface for MIL-STD-1 BBC low-level data equipment (burst or synchronous) at 300 bps. DATA 1200 - Selects interface for MIL-STD-188C lowlevel data equipment (burst or synchronous) at 1200 bps. 2400- Selects interface for MIL-STD-188C low-level data equipment (burst or synchronous) at 2400 bps.

Black and white ball. Pivots to white when selective call signal is received. In this TM, it will be referred to as the white flag. Selects any one of four functions and used in conjunction with MODE control: 1. 2. 3. 4. SEND - Spring-loaded, momentary position that initiates the transmission of a l-minute conference call signal. RCV - Provides for reception of a selective/conference call signal. QUIET - Disables audible alarm during reception of a selective/conference call signal. White flags operate normally. RESET - Spring-loaded, momentary position that stops the lminute call transmission and resets the SEL CAL/CON CAL white flags.

Frequency Display SAT OFFSET Control CON CAL Indicator DISPLAY Control VOLUME Control RXMT Connector VOICE/DATA Connector

Dis@aystransmNer and receiver frequency in LOS mode and transmitter frequency in SAT mode. Selects any one of four preset receiver offset frequencies mode. in SAT

Black and white ball. Pivots to white when conference call signal is received. In thii TM, itwill be referred to as the whiie flag. Adjusts the intensity or extinguishes frequency display. Adjusts the audio output level of the handset in VOICE mode. Interface connector for RXMT cable. Interface connector for handset in VOICE and RXMT modes. Interface connector for TSECKY-57 A$;: in X2 mode.

X MODE Connector SQUELCH Control MHZiKHZ Controls FUNCTION Control SIGNAL Strength Meter Battery Connector Battery Connectors XMT PWR Control
Figure 22-14.

receiver gain to mute noise in VOICE, RXMT, Xl and X2

Provides operator selection of operating frequencies. Powers R/T on and off and selects either SAT or LOS modes of operation. Indicates relative transmitter power and receive signal strength. Interface connector for external battery or power supply. Interface connector for external battery.
Adjusts the transmit power in SAT mode and in LOS mods.

RT-1402.WG ARC-187

Chapter 34 SATCOM 22-19

Syslcm Controls nntl Indkuors

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

9. MODE -

RXMT. As required. Observethe following:

10. XMT PWR I I. Signal meter -

Note Turning the Z-AHP to CIPHER position transferssystem control to the RED HANDSET (TAC/EWO or PILOT) as selectedat TAC/EWO AUX ICS control. 22.5.3.3.3 PSC-3/KY-58 System. Key the PSC31 KY-58 systemand observethe following: 1. TRANSMIT transmitting. i/4 full scale minimum when

a. TRANSMIT - l/4 full scale minimum when transmitting. b. RECEIVE - 3/4 full scale minimum when receiving a good signal. KeythepSC-3systemandproceedwith~~~~o~. 22.5.3.3 Secure TransmitiReceive Mode

2. RECEIVE - 3/4 full scale minimum when receiving a good signal. 22.5.3.3.4 Operation (Secure). Key the tmnsmitter and wait for the preambletone to stop,then proceed with communications. 22.8 AN/US@1 13(V)l RADIO COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM 22.8.1 System Description. The ANRTSQ-113(V) radio countermeasures systemprovidesboth fixed- frequencyand frequency-agileradio communicationscapability aswell as radio frequencybandESM andECM capability. In the ECM and ESM modes, the system providescommunicationsmonitoring capability orjamming capability againstsingle-channelfixed-frequency or slow frequency-hoppingcommunicationsin the HF, VHF, and UHF ranges. When not being used in the ECM/ESM mode, the system may be operatedas a standardradio for conventional communications or as an antijam radio for ECCM communications. The two radiocommunicationmodesarereferredto asCOMM-1 andCOMM-2, respectively.Two AN/USQ-113 systems are installed on the EP-3J. System No. 1 is controlled and operatedfrom SSl. SystemNo. 2 is controlled and operatedfrom SS2. Additional, system-level,USQ-113 detailed maintenance instructions are contained in NAVAIR 16-3OUSQ113-1. 22.8.1.1 Components. Figure 22-15 provides a iistingofsystemcomponents byquantity,nomenciature, part number, and location. Refer to Chapter 1 for individual system componentinstallations. 22.8.1.2 Power Distribution. Electrical power to both USQ-113 systemsis providedby MAIN AC BUS A, distributed through circuit breakerslocated on the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. Thereare three circuit breakersfor eachsvstem locatedon the mission circuit breakerpanel labeled CONTROL, RECEIVER EXCTR, and HPA.

22.5.3.3.1 Initial Control Settings. For secure voice transmit and receive operations,set the controls as foliows: 1. FUNCTION operation). 2. MODE X2. OFF (ccw). Adjust as desired. CW until audio mutes. To desired frequency. SAT OR LOS (for desired

3. SQUELCH 4. VOLUME 5. SQUELCH -

6. FrequencyMHZ KHZ 7. XMT PWR -

As required.

8. AUX ICS HANDSET - SATCOM (PILOT or TAC/EWO as required). 9. Signal METER Observefor following:

a. TRANSMIT - l/4 full scale minimum when transmitting. b. RECEIVE - 3/4 full scale minimum when receiving a good signal. 22.5.3.3.2 KY-58 Setup. Perform the following to initialize the PSC-3 dedicatedKY-58: 1. FILL (KY-58) - Load CODE (OPERATIONAL or TEST as required). 2. Z-AHP POWER 3. PLAIN/CIPHER ON CIPHER,

ORIGINAL

22.20

NAVAIR 0%75PAA.1.3

LOCATION

Antenna-Receive

AS4242/USQ-11301)

Figure 22-15. ANAJSQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures System List of Components

L(n,

““>I

VW

MU,,

““L

Figure 22-16. C-12160OperatorControl The RECEIVER EXCTR and HPA circuit breakers for each system are 115-Vat, 3-phasecontacts. The CONTROL circuit breakersare single-phasecontacts, each powered from a different phaseof the 1I5-Vat, 3-phasesourceMAIN AC BUS A. The USQ-113 No. 1 operatorcontrol is poweredby 115Vat phaseA. The USQ-113 No. 2 operatorcontrol is poweredby 115 Vat phaseB. Within each system, 26-Vdc operatingpower for the USQ- 113operatorcon&01is producedby the USQ-113 systemcontroller. The 26-vdc power is routed from the systemcontroller connectorPI to the operatorcontrol connectorP2. 22.6.2 Component Description 22.6.2.1 C-12160 Operator Control. The C-12160 operatorcontrol provides all operatorinterface for the ANKJSQ-113(V)l. Operated-initiated commands are transferredto the system controller and the operator control receivesstatusfrom the system controller. The statusinformation updatesandmaintains the display.A printer providesa hardcopy of target frequencies when requested by the operator.The operatorcontml is powered by 400 Hz, 115 Vat, single phase and 26 Vdc. Refer to Figures 22-16 and 22-17 for an explanationof controls and indicators. Electrical power is applied via rearpanel connectorsJl , J2, and 13. 22.6.2.2 C-12159 System Controller. The system controller is a microprocessorcontrolled unit that processesand executescommands from the operator control or data loader and also supplies statusinformation to the display.The system controller doesnot have any operatorcontrols or indicators. The unit is powered ORIGINAL

22-21

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

CONTROL/SWITCH Display Keypad ELAPSED TIME JAMlMON Cathode

FUNCTION ray tube (CRT), &inch display mode.

20-key, lighted keypad. Allows control of the system through keypad entries. Records total system has been energized. Two-position toggle switch which selects jammer or monitor mode of operation when scanning. Also enables transmitter test during system test when in the JAM position. Two-position toggle switch which selects local or remote operation.

LOCAUREMOTE PWR BRT HDST VOL FILL TEST/FEED

Circuit breaker toggle switch which turns system power on and off. Control brightness of display screen. Two headset jacks. Provides input for operator and observer microphone, headphone, and push-to-talk switch. Two controls to vary the level of headset audio for operator and observer HDST jacks. Fill jack to provide input for loading target tables and COMM-2 frequency tables from the data loader. Three-position control which advances printer paper at one line per second when in the FEED position and initiates a printout of all characters when in the TEST position. Center position is off and the switch will spring-return to center. Light emitting diode that, when loit. indicates the printer is ready. LED end of paper indicator which indicates that the printer is out of paper or paper is not installed properly.

DTR EOP

Figure 22-17. C-12160OperatorControl - Controls and Indicators by 28 Vdc from receiver/transmitterRT-1647,via front panel connectorsJ1 throughJ4. 22.6.2.3 RT-1647 Receiver/Transmitter. The RT-1647 R/T hastwo frequencybands:20 MHz to 225 MHz and400 MHz to 500 MHz. The WT and the external high-power amplifier form the transmitter.The R/T also functionsas ascanningRfT andwill reportdetected signals to the operator via the system controller. The RT-1647 doesnot have any operatorcontrols or indicators. The unit is powered by 115Vat, 400 Hz, 3-phase, applied via front panel connectorsJS and Jl 1, and rear panel connectorsJ12 and J13. 22.6.2.4 AM-7434 High-Power Amplifier Radio Frequency. The HPA receives the 20- to 500-MHz signal from the R/T andamplifies the signalto 400 watts FM and 100 watts AM. The system controller reduces the power out up to 21 dB in 3-dB steps.The HPA is poweredfrom 115Vat, 400 Hz, 3-phasepowervia rearmountedjacks Jl throughJ5.Referto Figures22-18and 22-19 for an explanationof the controls and indicators. ORIGINAL
22-22

22.6.2.5 MX-11376 Data Loader. Hand-held device that provides a means to edit, store, and transfer COMM-2 and ESM/ECM frequencytables to the system controller.Frequencytablesandsysteminformation can be downloaded from the system controller to the data loader. The data loader has a 2-line, 16character LCD and can be used in place of the operatorcontrol. 22.6.2.6 Operator Control Keypad. Figure 2220 shows the layout of the operator control keypad. Figure 22-21 gives a mnctional descriptionofeach key. 22.6.3 Special Operating Procedures At theoperator control unit, setthe controlsasfollows: a. PWR OFF. LOCAL.

b. LOCAL/REMOTE c. JAM/MON d. TEST/FEED JAM.

Centerposition.

NAVAIR

01-75PAA-1.3

Figure 22-18. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Panel e. BRTandVOL Mid-positions. 2. PressMODE key, 8 key, and 0 key. The display should provide the following information on the status screenand prompt for the equipment fiequencyrange. a. Frequencyrange 1. Set PWR switch to ON and observethat after a short warmup period, one of the ECMiESM displays appearon the display screen.
22-23

22.6.3.1 ANlUSCt-113(V) System Configuration. Perform the following stepsto properly configure

the radio countermeasures system for operationaltest. 20.000 - 499.975. 40140 (orhigherrevision). b. Software versions-

ORIGINAL

CONTROUlNDlCATOR PRIMARY POWER REFLECTED/FORWARD RF POWER POWER MONITOR FM Total Hours OVERTEMP PRIMARY POWER DC POWER AM

FUNCTION Circuit breaker switch that turns amplifier overload protection.

power on and off and provides
power to be measured by

Two-position switch that selects forward or reflected the POWER MONITOR meter.

Indicates level of forward or reflected power when transmitting. LED which, when illuminated, indicates FM operating mode.

Indicates total hours unit has energized. LED which, when illuminated, LED which, when illuminated, LED which, when illuminated, LED which, when illuminated, indicates overtemperature condition in the HPA.

indicates that primary power supply is energized. indicates dc power is applied to the HPA. indicates AM mode of operation.

Figure 22-19. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Controls and Indicators h. KY-58 installed No.

Note Equipment frequencyrangefor the (V)l system installed on the EPJJ is 3 (20 to 500). 3. After all the options have been set to parameters shown above, the STD key must be pressedto permanentlysavethe systemconfiguration. 4. PressCLR key on keypad. 22.6.3.2 COMM-1 Mode. In the COMM-1 mode, the equipment functions as a normal communications R/T. The COMM-1 mode is selectedthrough useof the C-l key command. When in the COMM-I mode, the bottom two rows of keys on the keypadareredefinedto control the R/T. The C-l key command is usedto alternatebetweentwo COMM-1 menus.The two menusare designatedas the primary screenand alternatescreen. On the primary screen,the upper left-hand key is W AM/FM; on the alternatescreen, the upperleft-handkey is COMM-I MODE. The functions of the keys are shown graphically on the display unit. Refer to Figure 22-22for the fnnctional descriptions of the redefined keys. To operate the AN/USC&I 13(V)] in COMM-I mode, the operator must refer to the screenfor the position of the redefined keys. The function of the keys will be as shown on the screen.To return to the ECM/ESM mode, pressEXIT COMM-1 key. The last frequencythat was storedwill be the frequencystoredwhen exiting COMM-1 mode.

f--ERTj

Figure 22-20. OperatorControl Keypad c. Remotebaud rates d. Dual R/T antennase. Power reduction 9600/9600. Yes. Yes. Yes. No.

f. Power measurementg. loo-watt max power ORIGINAL

22-24

NAVAIR

01.75PAA-1.3

KEY

FUNCTION
White-legend keys

DESCRIPTION

c-1 c-2 STOP 0 thru 9

Communications mode COMM-1 Communications mode COMM-2 Stop scan Numeric keys Decimal point

Configures Configures

the system to operate in the standard-communications the system to operate in the antijam-communications

mode. mode.

Stops scan mode for changing parameters, functions, and/or target/search table editing. If pressed a second time, scan mode restarts. Used to enter numbers when entering or changing frequencies, etc. Used to enter decimal point when entering frequencies that require a decimal point. parameters,

or other parameters

RNG MODE

Range Mode

Used to enter the lower and upper frequency limits of the ECMIESM search range. Used to enter parameters and perform functions not directly accessible through the keypad. Each parameter or function is assigned a mode number. Pressing this key displays a mode list summary from which the operator may select the desired mode. Repeatedly pressing this key sequences through all mode lists. Entering the mode number completes the mode selection. Stores a parameter, frequency, or table in nonvolatile memory.

ST0 LD

Store Load

Used in conjunction with other keys to load variables, to load tables into volatile (current) memory from nonvolatile memory, and to display parameters instead of options. Aborts the current keypad entry or function and exits the target/search editor. Pressing the key twice will refresh the ECM/ESM display. Yellow-legend keys (function keys) table

CLR

Clear

TTBL

Target table editor

Used to load a target table from nonvolatile memory and enter target table editor, reenter target table editor, or store a target table in nonvolatile memory. If the priority mode is selected, then the priority target table is used. Used to load a COMM-2 table from nonvolatile memory and enter COMMZ table editor, reenter COMM-2 table editor, or store a COMMZ table in nonvolatile memory. Used to load a limited search table from nonvolatile memory and enter search table editor, reenter search table editor, or store a limited search table in nonvolatile memory. Used to select either target table 1 or target table 2. Limited search table and priority table selected corresponds to target table selected and are automatically reloaded from nonvolatile memory. The main target tables are not reloaded from nonvolatile memory, Selects scanning format. Repeatedly pressing key sequences normal, selective priority, and blind scanning formats. Used to enter ECM/ESM time-out parameter. through

CTBL

COMM-2 table editor Limited search table editor Table number

STBL

TBL#

FMT TIME

Scanning format Time-out

Figure 22-21. OperatorControl Keypad Functions (Sheet1 of 2)

22.25

NAVAIR III-75PAA-1.3

T”,“”

I I”..

----

. . . .

. .-.-

Jamming modulation CLK RCD Time-of-day Record clock

Selects type of jamming Sets the time-of-day

modulation.

clock. Operator is prompted to enter the minimum

Initiates the ESM record function. and maximum record times. Green-legend

keys (keys active when in editor)

RCL DEL

Recall Delete Dash

Recalls a table editor and steps through the table one frequency at a time. Deletes frequencies when editing a frequency table or when HOLD scan function is engaged.

Used to specifya range of frequencieswhen in the editor. Not valid when
editing the limited search table or priority target table. Blue-legend keys If pressed a second time, the search algorithm The active target can then be

RUN HOLD FRZ ALT

Start scan Hold scan Freeze display Alternate

Starts the search algorithm. stops.

Used to hold the scan at an active frequency. monitored or jammed continuously. Used to freeze the scanning display so

that the graphed and listed frequencies

can be read and analyzed.
Used to select or deselect alternatefrequency table when in scanningmode. Other&e, used to switch between parameters and options of ECM/ESM display. White legend on red key ZERO Zeroize Used to zeroize (erase) target tables and COMM-2 frequency plan from nonvolatile memory. Volatile tables are not affected.

Figure 22-21. OperatorControl Keypad Functions (Sheet2 of 2) 22.6.3.3 COMM-2 Mode. In the COMM-2 mode, the equipmentfunctions as an antijam communications R/T. The COMMZ mode is selectedthroughuse of the C-2 key. When in the COMM-2 mode, the bottom two rows of keys on the keypad areredefinedto control the m. The C-2 key command is usedto alternatebetween two COMM-2 menus.The two menusaredesignated as the primary screenand alternatescreen.On the primary screen,the lower left-hand key is ENTER MOD; on the alternate screen, the lower left-hand key is AUDIO TEST. The functions of the keys are shown graphically on the display unit. Refer to Figure 22-23 for the functional descriptionsof the redefinedkeys. To operatethe ANiUSQ-113(V)l in COMM-2 mode, the operator must refer to the screenfor the position of the redefined keys. The function of the keys will be as shown on the screen. 22.7 LTN-72 INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM NO. 2 (INS 2) . . .. INS 2 is a self-contamed, all-weather, wonawrae navigation system. The INS is independentof gronndbasednavigation aids. The system suppliescontinuous accurateposition, navigation, and guidancedata.INS 2 comprisesthe INU, BU, CDU, MSU, anda 5-volt lighting panel. The INU and battery are located at bay 44; the CDU, MSU, and lighting panel are located at the TACYEWO console (Figure 22-24). INS 2’s operation is identical to INS 1‘s. For additional information on the LTN-72 system, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1, Section VIII. 22.7.1 Component Description. The MSU and CDU for INS 2 are located at the TAC/EWO station. The TNU and battery are locatedon the floor of bay 44.

ORIGINAL

22-26

NAVAIR

0%75PAA-1.3

FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION
Primary Screen

I

RT AM/FM RCV BW SQL ON/OFF PRESET GRD=#O INCR FREQ DECR FREQ CHANGE FREQ

Selects AM or FM of receiver-transmitter. Selects narrowband, mediumbend, or wideband receive bandwidth.

Turns squelch on or off. Selects preset frequency Increases Decreases channels I through 9. Guard channel frequency increments. is preset 0.

operating frequency in 25kHz

operating frequency in 2%kHz increments.

Allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to change operating frequency. LD key of keypad enters new frequency without affecting stored frequency. ST0 key stores new frequency. Selects ECM/ESM mode of operation. Alternate Screen

EXIT C-l

COMM-1 MODE START TEST KY MODE

Selects operating

mode: Normal, SATCOM, duplex, orjammer.

Initiates system self-test and-causes results to be displayed on display. Allows selection of crypt0 mode when system is configured with external crypt0 equipment. When SATCOM mode is selected, key is renamed XMT OFFSET. The XMT OFFSET key, when pressed, allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to change the SATCOM offset frequency. Increases power in 3dB increments. Power levels in Afvl mode are 0.8, 1.5, 3,6. 12, 25, 50, and 100 watts, Power levels in FM mode are 3,6,12,50,100,200, and 400 watts. Decreases power in 3dB increments. Power levels in AM mode are 0.8,1 S, 3,6.12, 2550, and 100 watts. Power levels in FM mode are 3.6,12,50,100,200, and 400 watts. Stores entire COMM-1 setup (does not include preset frequency memory). Selects ECMlESM mode of operation. channels in volatile

INCR POWER DECR POWER

STORE SETUP EXIT C-l

Figure 22-22. COMM-1 Mode Display Functions The NAV unit connectsto the TAS computer and magnetic compasssystem.
LTN-72 INU. The INU determinesthe geographic position of the aircraft from a gyro-stabilized, four-gimbal, all-attitude platform assembly. The INS is a wanderingazimuth system in which the platform assembly is allowed to take an arbitrary anglewith respect to true north. The platform assembly consists of four gimbals,two accelerometers, andtwo gyros. The sensed 22.7.1.1

systemto analogandbinary formats for useby the IDC and CDU. The CDU is a multifunction display and controller that allows the operatorto input waypoint andpresentpositiondatato theINU. The CDU also provides status annunciatorsfor system ALERT, BATT, andWARN.
22.7.1.2 LTN-72 CDU.

acceleration signals aresent to theINU digitalcomputer.
The digital computerperforms necessary computations to develop navigation data and gyro torquing signals. The navigation datais convertedin the INS digital sub-

22.7.1.3 LTN-72 MSU.

The MSU selectsthe modes

ofoperationforINS2andsuppliesoperatingandcontrol
voltagesto otherINS components.
22.7.1.4 LTN-72 Battery Unit. The BU providesa backupsoumeof dc power. If the INS 400~Hzpower is ORIGINAL

22.27

NAVAIR

@I-75PAA-1.3

FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION Primaty Screen

COMM-2 FORMAT ENTER WORD RCV SYNC INIT SYNC CHANGE RANGE EXIT C-2

Selects operating format A, 8, C, D, E, or F. Allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to enter word-of-day. enters new WOD. LD key of keypad signal from

Places unit into waiting state where it attempts to receive a synchronization another unit. Changes NET SYNC indication from READY to WAITING.

Initiates an emergency start on net synchronization. Makes this unit a net controller. Changes NET SYNC indication from WAITING to READY. Allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to change frequency range. LD key of keypad enters new frequency range. ST0 key stores new frequency range. Selects ECM/ESM mode of operation. Alternate Screen

COMM-2 FORMAT AUDIO TEST KY MODE RELAY MODE INCR POWER

Selects operating format A, B, C, D, E. or F. Initiates system self-test to allow audio playback test to be performed. Allows selection of crypt0 mode when system is configured with external crypt0 equipment. Select relay mode of operation. Increases power in 366 increments. Power levels in AM mode are 0.6,l S, 3,6,12, 25,50, and 100 watts. Power levels in FM mode are 3.6,12,50,100.200, and 400

watts.
DECR POWER Decreases power in 3dB increments. Power levels in AM mode are 0.8, 1 S, 3.6, 12, 2550, and 100 watts. Power levels in FM mode are 3,6.12,50,100,200, and 400 watts. Stores entire COMM-2 setup (does not include frequency table). Selects ECMlESM mode of operation.

STORE SETUP EXIT C-2

Figure 22-23. COMM-2 Mode Display Functions interrupted,the systemautomatically switchesto theBU for 27.5 Vdc power.
+5Volt Lighting Panel. The lighting panel,located at the TAC/EWO’s console,provides+5 Vat power to the MSU and CDU lighting circuits. 22.7.i.5 22.7.2 Power Requlrements. The LTN-72 system is supplied 11S-Vat, 400-Hz power from the main acbus B. The INU alsoreceives26-Vat, phaseB power via the FNIB for synchro excitation. To apply power to INS 2 system,pressthe following circuit breakers:

2. SYSTEM POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics circuit breakerpanel.
Operation. The lNU power supply converts 115-Vat,phaseB, 400-Hz power input to 27.5 Vdc and 28 Vdc. The ac input and a 115-Vat return are routed directly from the SYSTEM POWER (ARlNC561) circuit breakerto INU connector2JlB. Also, a 115-Vat, phase B and 115-Vat return are routed from the HEATER POWER (ARlNCS61) circuit breaker. The BU receives 27.5 Vdc from the INU. The 28 Vdc is routed to the MSU, the CDU, and to the INU fan power control relay. For control settings, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-I 1. 22.7.3

1. HEATER POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics circuit breakerpanel.

ORIGINAL

22-28

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

NOMENCLATURE
Inertial Navigation Unit Control Display Unit Mode Selector Unit Battery Unit Lighting Panel

PIN
452080-05 452090-02 452100-01 500012-01 91050133-029

LOCATION

Bays 43,44
Copilot Side Console Copilot Side Console Bay 44 Copilot Side Console

Figure 22-24. INS No. 2 SystemComponents 22.7.3.1 Magnetic Heading Input. INU 2 uses the magnetic headingoutput signal provided by INS 1, CAC. This signal is routed out of the CAC to INU 2 via the FNIB. 22.7.3.2 True Airspeed Unit. INU 2 usesthe output signalsfrom the TAS computer that is provided to INS 1.Thesesignalsgo directly from the TAS computer to the TAS indicator, INU 1, and INU 2. 22.7.3.3 Platform Heading Reference. INU 2 uses26-Vat, phaseA referencesignal that is provided to INU 1 from the FNIB. 22.7.3.4 CDU Signals. The CDU convertsdatasent by the INU and displays it as alphanumericcharacters. Communication from the INU is accomplishedusing four 32-bit words, a datavalid discrete,and threeannunciatordiscretes. The datavalid discreteenablestheCDU to displaydata.The annunciatordiscretesare controlled by the INU and go directly to the ALERT, BATT, and WARN annunciators.Present position and waypoint datais sent from the CDU to the INU, using one 32-bit word and a data valid discrete.The data sent from the CDU is determinedby setting the AUTO/MANiRMT switch and the datakeyboardpushbuttons. 22.7.3.5 MSU Signals. TheMSUcontrolspowerto the INS andthe mode ofoperation. The INS operational codesare selectedby a five-position selectorswitch on the MSU. Modes of operation are Standby (STBY), ALIGN, Navigation (NAV), and Attitude Reference (ATT REF). 22.7.3.6 Monitor Circuit Signals. Monitor circuits in the INU are controlled by the digital computer and provide flag signals and action/malfimction/status codesto the CDU and MSU. 22.7.3.7 Control/Data Signals. The INU provides No. 1 pitch and roll, platform heading,true heading valid, primary P/R warning, Nos. 2 and 3 pitch and
22.29

roll, Nos. 1 and2 digital warning output,digital warning input, and cross system automatic data input information as data to the CDU. INU 2 also provides ARINC binary (BIN) clock, sync,anddatasignalsto all interfaced navigationequipmentfor timing andcommunication. 22.7.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. To remove power in an emergencysituation, pull the following circuit breakers: a. HEATER POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker,locatedat the forwardright electronics rack circuit breakerpanel. b. SYSTEM POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker,locatedat theforward right electronics rack circuit breakerpanel. 22.7.5 Components and Special Operating Procedures. SeeNAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 for detailed descriptionsand operatingprocedures. 22.6 WJ-6716 HF SCANNING RECEIVER 22.6.1 System Description. The WJ-8718AMFP HF receiver (Figure 22-25) is capableof receiving and demodulatingfrequenciesbetween5 kHz and 29.9999 MHz in sevenmodes, including AM, FM, USB, LSB, ISB, CWV, and CWF. Five selectablebandwidthsmay be used with AM, FM, and CW modes. Tuning is accomplished by a tuning wheel, keypad, or any of 99 programmable memory channels. The receiver will AUTO SCAN memory channels from 1 through 86. Channels87 through 99 arereservedfor frequencysector scandata. The WE871 8A/MFP HF receiver is located at the radio operator’sstation.All receivercontrolsarelocated on the face of the panel-mountedunit. The HF scanner antennais a dual output,receiveonly antenna. The antenna is locatedon the forward-right side ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75P&b1.3

Figure 22-25. WJ-8718A HF ScanningReceiver of the aircraft at FS 212. The antennahas a built-m preamplifier. The systemcomponentsare listed below. Unit 1. HF receiver Part No. WJ-871SAIMFP Location In-flight communica tor station Forwardright side, station functionkey (*) is usedto placethe receiverin theBITE mode andto clear the numberedmemory channels. Also locatedon the same keypad and on other keypadsare terminatorfunction keys that allow the operator to complete a numerical entry by assigning its function. An accepted numericalkeypad entry is not actedupon until a termination switch is activated. Terminator switch namesand their assignedfunctions are as follows: KeJ@ GeneralKeypad MEM ADRS Keypad Switch MHZ kHz RECALL STORE Function RF frequency BFO or RF frequency Memory address Memory address Memory address Scanpause,in seconds Signal level threshold AccessBITE (usedwith 17) ReceiverBITE test Clearsmemory channels1 thru 16(usedwith 10)

2. I-IF scanner antema 212

GA000062-001

22.8.2 WJ-8718 Operating Procedures 22.8.2.1 HF 3 Scan Receiver Control. HF 3 comprisesa WE87 18A scanreceiverandanactive bladeHF antenna.HF 3 audio is accessibleto the operatoron the AN/AIC-22 systemand the AUK ICS system.The WJ871SA/MFP option allows local digital control ofall HF 3 receiver parameterswhile providing accessto 100 programmable memory channels.Local control of the receiver is accomplished through momentary-contact pushbutton switches arrangedin functional blocks on the WJ-8718AiMFP frontpanel(seeFigure22-25).Figure 22-26 lists and defines the functions of the front panel controls and indicators. 22.8.2.2 HF 3 Scan Receiver Operation. Apply power to the WJ-8718A scan receiver and associated antenna by pushing in the DC HF 3 and WJ-8718 PREAMP circuit breakeron the forward left electronics circuit breakerpanel. The general purpose keypadis a 16buttonswitchblock locatedto the left of the tuning wheel.The multiRmction, numericalselectionbuttonslabeledOthmugh9 areutilii to enterRF and BFO t?equencies, signalthresholdlevel, BFO offset, dwell time, and memory address. A special ORIGINAL

ScannerMode Keypad

EXAM DWEEL THRS

GeneralKeypad

(‘)

The CLEAR key will remove an undeterminednumerical entry from the receiver’s input circuitty. Once the terminatoris entered,the CLEAR switch doesnothing. The CLEAR switch is also used to release the EXAM mode.

22.30

NAVAIR

01.75PAA-1.3

CONTROUINDICATOR AUDIO SIG STR meter LINE AUDIO SIGNAL STR AM, FM, USB. LSB. ISB, CWV, and CWF BFO BFO OFSITHRS FREQUENCY/MHZ POWER PUSH ON/OFF SCANNER MODE EXAM, HANDOFF, AUTO SCAN, LOCKOUT, THRS, and DWELL GAIN MODE MGC SLOW, FAST RF GAIN IF BANDWlDTHlkHz .3, 1, 3.2, 6, and 16 FAULT ENTRYIDATAIRCVR Keypad Tuning wheel TUNE FAST, MED, SLOW, LOCK PHONE LEVEL ISB, NORM LINE AUDIO LEVEL LOCAL and REMOTE MEM ADRS display RECALL and STORE LVL display

FUNCTION Displays signal strength of received audio signal. Screwdriver adjustment (below center of meter) used to calibrate display. Pushbutton meter. that selects line audio level on AUDIO SIG STR

Pushbutton that selects signal strength on meter. Seven pushbuttons that select the detection mode. oscillator function.

Pushbutton that engages beat frequency (Used with CWV pushbutton.)

A 4 character digital display that shows the selected BFO of&et or threshold level. Seven-character frequency. digital display that shows selected receiver. mode.

Pushbutton that energizesldeenergizes Sii pushbuttons

that select desired operating

Pushbutton that selects manual gain control. (Used with RF GAIN control.) Two pushbuttons that select AGC attack and decay time. Analog control for manual gain control. MODE MGC pushbutton.) Fiie pushbuttons bandwidth. that select intermediate (Used with GAIN frequency

Three visual FAULT indicators. A 16-pushbutton keypad selects RFlBFO frequency, level BFO Dwell memory address, and BITE. Selects desired frequency. Four pushbuttons that select rate of change for tuning wheel. signal

Stacked dual analog controls adjust the No. 1 and No. 2 audio levels. Screwdriver adjustment Two pushbuttons used on EP-3J). Two-character used to adjust audio level.

that select control position for receiver (not

digital display of selected memory address.

Two pushbuttons that access 99 programmable memory channels. (Used with MEM ADRS display and keypad.)

Figure 22-26. WJ-8718AMFP HF ReceiverControls and Indicators The special iimction switch is identified with an asterisk (*). The * key is used, in this application, to accessBITE programmode, receiverBITE tests,andto clear all numberedmemory channels.The * key also turns on/off special operatingmodes, such as handoff, master/slave, and dwell. The * key provides accessto a BITE program that provides a diagnostictest of the front panel switches. Becausethe execution of the program is software dependent,the program also provides a test of the microprocessor, selectedsignals,EPROM, anddatalines. The program is accessed by pressingthe 1,7, and * keys, in ORIGINAL

22-31

that order. All the LEDs and each segment of the 7-segment display (except the BFO sign) on the front panel will immediately come on. PressingI,& and *, in order,will invoke the receiver BITE tests. The receiver BITE tests consist of seven teststhat examineRAM, +15 V, -15 V, lstLO,ZndLO, bandwidthselection,andBFO tuning, in the orderlisted, producing an error level code in the process.The test in progressis displayedby number in the BFO OFS/THRS LVL display window. The error code is a binaryweighted code. Any errors detectedare summed and displayed in the FREQUENCY/MHz display window at the end of the seven@test. The CLEAR key is used to exit the BITE tests. The * key is used to erasethe contentsof the numbered memory channels. Each memory channel (1 through 99) is clearedwhen the 9, 9, 9 and * keys are pressedin the given sequence. 22.8.2.3 RF Frequency. The WJ-87 18A HF receiver is designedto receive and demodulateRF frequencies in the 5 kHz to 29.99999 MHz range. The receiver can be tuned in the local mode by using the generalpurposekeypad or the tuning wheel. 22.8.2.3.1 RF Frequency: Keypad Entry. To entera tuned frequencyfrom the keypad,the number is enteredin order,from MSD to LSD, andterminatedwith kHz or MHz. An undetermined, undesirednumerical entry can be clearedfrom the receiver’s internal circuits by engagingthe CLEAR switch. As soon as the terminator is entered, the operation is complete and the CLEAR switch has no effect. If the ENTRY FAULT LED glows after entry of an RF frequency, an invalid frequency has been entered. To disengagethe FAULT light, reenterthe desiredfrequencyandterminatewith kHz or MHz. Use of the kHz or MHz terminator is a matter of choice. For example, 123kHz could be entered1,2,3, kHz or decimal, 1,2, 3, MHz. In either case,the display will read 00.12300. Entry of the decimal point is unnecessary if a whole number is entered. For example, to enter4 MHz, press the digit 4 key and the MHz kev. The internal circuitrv will t&e care of the decimal and the display will reah 04.00000. 22.8.2.3.2 RF Frequency: Tuning Wheel Entry. The one-tinger tuning wheel on the microprocessor front panel can be used to dial the tuned RF frequency to a selectedresolution. The tuning resolution switches are in the TUNE switch block to the right of the tuning wheel: FAST represents1-kHz increments,MED repreORIGINAL

sents loo-Hz increments,and SLOW representsIO-Hz increments.Selectionof a tuning resolutiondisengages the LOCK switch and the tuning wheel can be usedto dial the frequency. The tuning RF frequency display is decrementedat the selectedtuning resolution if the tuning wheel is rotatedcounterclockwise.It is incremented,at the selected tuning resolution, if the tuning wheel is rotatedclockwise. Tuning past the end of the range (00.00000 to 29.9999MHz) will causethe frequencyto incrementto theotherendof the bandandcontinuetuning in thesame increasingor decreasingdirection.The display will lock on the registeredfrequency when the LOCK button is engagedand the tuning wheel will be ineffective. The LOCK switch hasno effect on the keypadRF frequency entry. 22.8.2.3.3 FREQUENCY/MHz Display. RF frequency is displayedby a 7-digit, ‘I-segmentLED readout. As the frequencyis entered,from MSD to LSD on the front panel keys, eachdigit is displayedin the LSB position and is displacedto the left one spacewith each new numerical entry. This calculator-style display reflects all numerical entriesto the generalpurposekeypad, except BFO frequency, until the terminator is entered. 22.8.2.4 BFO Frequency 22.8.2.4.1 BFO Frequency: Keypad Entry. To entera BFO frequencyfrom the keypad,the CWV and &BFO key must be engaged.An enterednumber between -8.00 and +8.00 is terminated with kHz and is displayedby the BFO display. 22.8.2.4.2 BFO Frequency: Tuning Wheel Entry. The one-finger tuning wheel can be used to dial a BFO frequencyif the BFO and CWV switchesare engaged. Selecting a tuning resolution from the TUNE switch block to the right of the wheel disengages the LOCK switch andallows the tuning wheel to dial a BFO frequency. The only effective tuning resolutions for BFO tuning are the lOO-Hz rate (FAST) and the IO-Hz rate (MED or SLOW). Rotating the wheel clockwise will incrementthe displayed frequencyfrom a negative offset, through zero, to the upper limit of the range. Rotatingthewheel counterclockwisewill decrementthe displayed frequency from a positive offset, through zero,to the lower limit of the range. 22.8.2.4.3 fBF0 Offset Switch. The offset sign can be changedby the BFO f key. Pressing the key causes the minus (-) sign to be alternatelydisplayedand removed.Absence of the sign on the display indicates positive offset.

22.32

NAVAIR Qi-75PAA-I.3

22.8.2.4.4 BFO OFWTHRS LVL Display. The SF0 tiequency is displayed by a 3digit, 7-segment, LED readout,with a minus sign (-). The BFO frequency canbe enteredlocally t?om the keypador tuning wheel. The BFO frequencyrangeis ti.00 kHz andis displayed in kHz to a IO-Hz resolution. The LSD of the BFO OFQTHRS LVL display is also used to display dwell time and thresholdlevels. 22.8.2.5 Receiver Operating Parameters. Receiver operating parametersare enteredon fhe MFP switchesand transferredto fhe receiver automatically. Parameters can be stored in memory using the STORE switch, and transferredto the receiver from memory using the RECALL switch. There are four selectable parameters:detection mode, IF bandwidth, RF gain (MGC only), and gain mode. 22.8.2.5.1 Detection Mode. Detection modes are selected by the AM, FM, USB, LSB, ISB, CWV (variable),andCWF (fixed) pushbuttons.The CWV switch is associatedwith the BFO switch and must he engagedto establish a new BFO frequency in the addressedreceiver. In the AM, FM, and CW modes, the line audio and phones audioaretakenfrom fhereceiver’sAM, FM, and CW detectors,respectively. One of the five available bandwidths can be selected for AM, FM, and CW modes.The CWV switch enablesthe variableBFO. The CWF switch enablesthe fixed BFO (455 kHz). In the ISB mode, USB and LSB audiosare available and can be monitored with stereoheadphones. 22.8.2.5.2 IF Bandwidth. The IF BANDWIDTH/ kHz switch block allows selection of .3, 1, 3.2, 6, and 16kHz IF bandwidths. In the AM, FM, andCW detection modes, any one of the five bandwidths should be selected. Bandwidth selectionis ineffective in the USB, LSB, and ISB detection modes,when a sidebandfilter bandwidthof approximately 3 kHz is assumed.To indicate this, the LED on the 3.2 kHz IF bandwidth will glow. 22.8.2.5.3 Gain Mode. TheGAINMODEswitches areMGC, SLOW (AGC), andFAST (AGC). The differencesin decaytimes of fast AGC and slow AGC make themusefulfor differentkinds of signals.IOthe tit AGC mode,the gainof the r&e&r adjustsaboutasquickly for a risein signalstrength(attacktime) asit doesfor a fall in signalstrength(decaytime). Fast ACX attackanddecay time is approximately15millisecondsfor each.In theslow AGC mode, attack time is also fast, but decay time is approximately 2 seconds slower.For AM andFM signals, thetotal power in thecarrierandsidebands dcesnot vary much with time at the transmitter.The main purposefor

AGC is to compensate for atmosphericlosses;therefore, fast AGC is best for AM and FM signals. For pulsed signals, such as telegraphy and single sidebandvoice signals,therearerapid fluctuationsin transmittedpower with recurring peaks. When this type of signal is received, it is desirable that AGC attacks quickly and decays slowly; therefore, slow AGC is desirable for USB, LSB, and ISB signals. When it is desirableto fix the gain, to makecomparisonsof signal strength,or to eliminate signalsor noise below a particular amplitude, fhe manual gain mode shouldbe used.In this mode, the RF GAIN control can be engagedand should be adjusted so that the signal strengthmeter registersat the MAN SET line. 22.8.2.5.4 RF Gain Control. When the receiver is in the MGC mode, rotatingthe RF GAIN control clockwise approximatesa linear increasein receivergain. To obtain the greatestlatitude for signal level change,engage the SIGNAL STR meter switch and set the gain control for an indication at fhe MAN SET mark on the meter. 22.8.2.8 Programmable Memory Channels 22.8.2.8.1 MEM ADRS Display. TheMFPaccesses99 channelsof addressable memory in locations 1through99. Memory location is enteredon the keypad and is terminatedwith RECALL or STORE. As soonas the terminatoris entered, the addressis displayedon the 2-digit, ‘I-segmentLED MEM ADRS display. When terminator STORE is selected,the memory location is loaded with the receiver parametersregisteredon the front panel.When terminator RECALL is selected,the parametersin the recalled memory channel are transferred to the receiver. Use of the EXAM key allows the contents of fhe numbered memory channelsto be examined without affecting receiver operation.The EXAM key can be usedto examine a selectedmemory channelor can be used10stepsequentiallythroughthenumberedmemory channels. To examinethecontentsof a single memory channel, enterthememory address on thegeneralpurposekeypad before pressingthe EXAM key. The contentsof the addressed channelwill be reflected by the front panel LEDs, but the receiver parameters will remain unchanged.The MEM ADRS display will blink on/off for the memory channelbeing examined. To step sequentially through the numbered memory channels,pressthe EXAM key with no preceding memory address.The front panel LEDs will reflect ORIGINAL

22-33

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

the contents of a memory channel, and the addressof that channel will appearin the MEM ADRS display. The channel that is initially accessedis determinedby the conditions in numerical sequence up to 99, thenback to 1 againuntil the EXAM mode is released. Activation of the CLEAR key releasesthe EXAM mode and restoresthe front panel LEDs to the receiver operating.parameters in effect before (and during) the EXAM procedure. The * key is also used to clear the contentsof the numberedmemory channels.To perform this function, the activation of the * key must be preceded by anentry of 9,9,9 on the generalpurposekeypad. 22.8.2.8.2 100th Memory Channel. A 100thmemory channelneedsno keypadentry to be addressed. The channel is accessedby engaging the STORE or RECALL switchesonly (no numberedaddress). The MEM ADRS display goesblank to indicate the 100thchannel access.The 100thmemory channelprovides the operator with a rapid accessmemory channel. 22.8.2.6.3 Scan Mode. The MFP memory scancapability allows the receiver to sequentially scan a selected group of memory channels. The memory locations arepreloadedwith receiverdata. During scanoperation,the storedparameters of each memory channel are automatically recalled and transferred to the receiver. As eachchannelis recalled,the received signal strength is compared to a selected thresholdlevel storedin that channel. When a channel is located where signal strengthequalsor exceedsthe threshold level, the scanning operation stops for a selected dwell time, and thenrestartsautomatically. PressingAUTO SCAN initiates a sequentialscanof the memory channels. If none of the memory channels arelocked out of the scan,the receiverscansthroughall channelsexceptthosereservedfor frequencysectorscan data storage(channels87 through 99). To omit a memory channel from the scan,enter the memory addresson the keypad, then pressthe LOCK OUT key. To remove a groupoflocations, enterthe first and last numbersof the group on the keypad,separated by a decimal point. To restorea channelor channels,use the sameprocedure,exceptpressLOCK OUT twice. 22.8.2.6.4 Signal Level Threshold. The threshold level is a level selectedfrom scan modes, that is compared to signal strength. The comparison determines whethera signalis strongenoughto bemonitored. Threshold level is selectablefrom 0 to 9. To establish ORIGINAL

thresholdlevel, thenumber is enteredon the keypadand terminatedwith THRS. The thresholdlevel will be displayed in the LSD of the BFO OFSTHRS LVL display. Threshold level must be selected and stored inde pendently in eachmemory channel. 22.8.2.6.5 Dwell Time. IfAUTO SCAN modeis to be utilized, a dwell time must be selected. Dwell time is selectablefrom 0.1 to 8 seconds.A zero entry to the keypad selects 0.1 seconds,a 1 selects 1 second,a 2 selects2 seconds, etc. The desirednumber is enteredon the keypad and terminated with the DWELL pushbutton. The selecteddwell time is automatically transferred to eachmemory channel. If dwell time is not selected, the 0.1 seconddwell time will be assumed.In automatic scanmode,the prcloadedmemory channelsaresequentially scannedand the parameterstransferredto the receiver. When an active channel is located (signal strengthequalto or greaterthan thresholdlevel) thescan locks at the active channelfor the established dwell time andrestartsautomatically.If a dwell time of 9 is entered, the scanstopsuntil restartedby pressingAUTO SCAN. 22.8.2.6.6 Handoff Operation. The HAND OFF switch is utilized during master/slavehandoff operations. Master/slave operation is only possible with receivers that are equippedwith the WJ-8718A/232M or WJ-8718A/488M remote control I/O option. 22.8.2.6.7 Fault Lights. The microprocessor front panel containsDATA, ENTRY, andRCVR fault indicators.The ENTRY fault indicatorilluminates ifan invalid number or out-of-sequence entry has beenmadeto the front panel switches. An invalid numerical entry could he any number outside of the terminating function. An out-of-sequence entry could be a terminator entry preceding a numerical entry. In either case,the light ceases to glow when a valid entry is made. The RCVR fault indicator glows red during operationif a power supply fault or LO unlocked signal is detected. 22.9 WING STORES CONTROL SYSTEM AND ANIALQ-170(V) SYSTEM The CMSS ANIALQ-17O(V)l is a tracking radar transmitter and receiver that includes the CMSS pod, a C-l 1508/ALQ-170 controller-indicator, a video monitor, a PDI, andthePDI selectpanel.The CMSS provides the capability to search,acquire, and track a target in a manner simulating the performance of enemy threats. There are two controller-indicators at SS4 that support WSpylonsat WS 12 andWS 15.APDIandaPDI select panel are located at the pilot and copilot stations.For information specific to theAN/ALQ-170 systemorganizational maintenanceand illustrated parts breakdown, refer to NAVAIR 16-30ALQl70-1.

22-34

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

22.9.1 Component Description. The CMSS is a three-channel monopulse radar system capable of utilizing different simulations in a given frequency band.Each simulation is containedin a SEM memory card and has the potential for five operatorselectable options.In addition to the simulations, the operatorcan selecttheNAV modethat is a standardPP1 radardisplay. During transmissionof a typical simulation, four modes of operation are available. These are SEARCH, ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISITION. In SEARCH mode, the antennascansin an attemptto find a target.A joystick-operated cnrsor is available to aid the operatorin searching.The ACQUISITION mode is engaged when a potential target is located.If the target is not valid, the CMSS returnsto the SEARCH mode.If the target is valid, the CMSS locks into the TRACK mode. In TRACK mode the CMSS follows the target range and angle movements. If the CMSS loses the targetwhile in the TRACK mode, a condition known as BREAK LOCK occurs.The CMSS moves into the REACQUISITION mode and uses severalmethods to iocatethe lost target.If reacquisitionis not successful,the CMSS returnsto SEARCH mode. For control settings and functions,refer to Figure 22-27. Note Observe all applicable cautions, warnings, and handling procedures for external wing stores as prescribed in NAVAIR Ol-75PA-75. 22.9.1.1 C-11509/ALQ-170(V) Controiierindicator. Provides control for a specific wing station pylon system (WS 12 or WS 15).The contmller-indicatorpermits the operatorto setthe mode of operation for the AN/ALQ-170 pod andmonitorssystemstatusinformation.Therearetwo controller-indicatorslocatedat SS4 console,immediately below the dual video monitors. For control settingsandfunctions,refer to Figures 22-27and 22-28. 22.9.1.2 WV-5372A Dual Video Monitors. Dual video monitors, used to display AN/ALQ-170 radar video and system information, are mounted in a 19inch rack directly above the controller-indicators (Figure 22-29). There are two 9-inch display monitors that connectto eachAN/ALQ-170 system andthe associated wing station pylon system (WS 12 or WS IS) (Figure 22-29).Both monitors arehigh-resolutionblack and white video monitors and operateon 120-Vat, 60Ha power.Poweris suppliedthroughacontrol relay.The control relay is connectedto an aneroidswitch that will remove power to the unit when a decreasein cabin pressure is sensed. The relay,aneroidswitch, and60-Hz receptaclefor each monitor is located directly behind the associated unit. A flip-down tray at the bottom of the Figure22-27. C-l 1508/ALQ-170(V) Controller-Indicator rack providesaccessto both control panels.For control settingsand functions, refer to Figure 22-30. 22.9.1.3 Position Display indicator. The PDI permits the flight station to monitor pod antennaposition. There is a PDI for eachsystem. One is locatedby the pilot glareshieldand the other is locatedby the copilot glareshield. 22.9.1.4 PDI Select Panel. The PDI select panel permits eitherpilot or copilot to selectbetweenboth WS pods,for information to be displayedon the PDI at their respectiveposition.TherearetwoPDIseiectpanels;one is locatedat the pilot side consoleand the other is at the copilot side console. 22.9.1.5 ANIALQ-170 Pod. The ANIALQ-170 CMSS pod is not addressed in the scopeof this manual. For more information on system operation,tests, and equipmentsuppott,refertoNAVAIR 16-3OALQ-170-l. 22.9.1.6 UPW Wiring. The AN/ALQ-170(V) system interconnectwiring provides interconnectionbetween AN/ALQ-170 countermeasures simulator pods at WS 12or WS 15,video indicator and control indicator (SS4 console), auxiliary equipment, PDI and PDI select panels (pilot and copilot), ICS interface, and

22-35

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

01-75PAA-1.3

CONTROUINDICATOR loystick

FUNCTION Located in the upper leh corner of the faceplate. Operation varies for different simulations, Typically, it can posttion a cursor on the display (and associated acquisition parameters) in range by up/down motion, and in azimuth by right/left motion. When pressed, it initiates some actton, e.g., search/acquisition transition. While in ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISITION modes, pressing the center returns the system to SEARCH. Also, when pressed, pages through text displayed on video monitor. Supplies 115 Vat and 28 Vdc power to the system. Power must be ON at least 5 minutes before the transmitter will operate. Energizes transmitter and initiates programmed search sequence for each simulation. Approximately 5 minutes after POWER ON, RDY light will illuminate when a SIM or NAV pushbutton is selected. When XMIT pushbutton is pressed, the XMIT/ON tllht illuminates. Used to inhibii LOCK ON or to break lock once locked on. This pushbutton illuminates at LOCK ON. Pressing this pushbutton will break lock and return the system to SEARCH or ACQUISITION mode, depending on the simulation. Afler this pushbutton is pressed once from the TRACK state, the lock-on switch light flashes, indicating that the hi counter is disabled and system cannot LOCK ON. Pressing this pushbutton a second time restores normal operation. When pressed while the system is in the idle state or SIM state (no transmit), a 20second snapshot of what is seen on the video monitor will be recorded. The ON light illuminates when the system is recording. When the system is transmitting in a SIM state or NAV state, the recorder and ON light turn on automatically. In the NAV state or SIM state (while transmitting), the recorder may be powered on or off at the operator’s discretion by pressing the RECORD switch. The recorder turns on automatically when a calibrate or test is finished. The recorder also turns on automatically for a short time to record the idle state test display when the idle state test is invoked.

‘OWER Switch I(MIT Switch

LOCK ON Switch

SIM 1 through 4 Switches

Any of these pushbuttons place the system in a SIM state in which a set of preprogrammed parameters is invoked to govern the details of the system’s SEARCH, ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISITION performance. Selection of a SIM pushbutton will determine the exact function of the joystick, LOCK ON pushbutton, and RANGE, AZIMUTH, and ELEVATION potentiometers, as well as details of the display in each operating mode. When a SIM pushbutton has been selected, the ON light is illuminated on that simulation, and the OPTION pushbuttons corresponding to those options that have been programmed illuminate. Selection of a SIM pushbutton causes a text describing that simulation to appear on the video monitor. Pressing a SIM key a second time exits the system from the SIM state to the IDLE state. A warning light that indicates an abnormally high temperature at some location in the CMSS group OH-S4/ALQ-17001) when temperature reaches 158 “F. This indication is normally accompanied by a warning message on the video monitor. No operator action is associated with this key other than a decision on terminating simulator operation. Returns the system to the IDLE state; i.e., to the state it was in after power turn-on, with the exception that the 5-minute warmup time is not reset. Thus, if the XMIT RDY light has been illuminated, itwill stay lit when the SYSTEM RESET is pressed. The SYSTEM RESET pushbutton may be used when some anomaly in display or operation is noticed.

HI TEMP Indicator

SYSTEM RESET Switch

Figure Z-28. C-l 1508Controller-IndicatorControls and Indicators (Sheet 1 of 3)

ORIGINAL

22-36

NAVAIR

OI-75PAA-I.3

CONTROlJtNDlCATOR AMP TEST

FUNCTION Checks operation of all lamps on the controller-indicator front panel. When it is pressed, all legends except the POWER OFF legend illuminate. When any simulation is selected, the options that have been programmed will illuminate, with the OFF legend illuminated. When an OPTION is selected, the ON legend will illuminate. An OPTION is deselected by pressing the same pushbutton a second time. OPTIONS are only selected or deselected while the system is in a SIM state. More than one OPTION may be selected at a time. Features related to elevation angle. Features related to angular tracking. Features related to range tracking. Features related to search, acquisition, and reacquisition. Other features, oflen related to gate structure. Controls some simulation-dependent, elevation-related function, often control of an antenna elevation position in SEARCH, ACQUISITION, and/or REACQUISITION modes. Controls brightness of indicator lamps. Controls some simulation-dependent, azimuth-related function. In the NAV mode, with OPTION 2 selected, this potentiometer allows manual control of antenna azimuth position. Controls some simulation-dependent, range-related function, e.g., the extent of range on video monitor. The range potentiometer also controls the range display in the NAV mode. The CALIB function performs the antenna calibration and system calibration for any selected simulation, The CALIB light illuminates when any SIM pushbutton is pressed. Before a calibration, the testercalibrator TS-4126/ALQ1700/) frequency should be set via the dial on the status tester-indicator to approximately 500. When CALIB switch is pressed. a preprogrammed calibration run lasting 3 to 4 minutes is begun. During the antenna calibration, the antenna increments through AZ/EL positions (-30, -15) (-20, -IO), (-10, -5) (0.0) (+10, +5). (+20. +lO), (+30, +15) degrees resting at each for 2 seconds. A GO or NO GO indication is given beneath the CALIB lamp for each of the antenna positions. A NO GO indicates that the commanded antenna gimbal position was not equal to the actual antenna gimbal position. During the system calibration, the target signal is injected, and stepped attenuation values are inserted decreasing at programmed time intervals as power increases. These attenuation levels are shown on the display. At lock-on, the LOCK indication on the video display appears. When the calibration run completes, a GO or NO GO appears beneath the CALIB legend for two seconds. A GO indication shows that the system calibration has passed. A NO GO indication shows either a failure to lock on or lock on at a signal level higher than the required system sensitivity. Afler the CALIB segment stops flashing, the GO light will be illuminated if both antennas calibrate and the system calibrate passed, otherwise the NO GO lamp will be illuminated.

Switch

IPTION 1 through 5 switches

IPTION IPTION IPTION IPTION IPTION

1 2 3 4 5

ELEVATION Potentiometer

IIM Potentiometer VIMUTH Potentiometer

?ANGE Potentiometer

:ALIB Switch

Figure 22-28. C-l 1508Controller-Indicator Controls andIndicators (Sheet2 of 3)

22-37

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

T”,“U

I I”,”

Allows a set of built-in tests to be performed, depending on the state the system is in. ATEST may ba performed from the IDLE state or from the SIM (no XMIT) state. When power or reset is depressed, a GO or a NO GO indication is given beneath the TEST legend by controller-indicator C-l 1508/ALQ-17001). This indicates that the controller-indicator is operating correctly. Pressing TEST in IDLE state causes BIT group 100, that enables tests for the AID convertercontroller CV-3907/ALQ-170(V), to be run. A GO indication signifies that all test results within group 100 have passed. The option 1 and option 2 lamps will also come on for 2 seconds when TEST is pressed in the IDLE state. Option 1 and option 2 should not be pressed during this 2-second period. The options have been provided for NRL evaluation. The operator should press RESET, if either of these options have been selected during IDLE state TEST. Pressing TEST in SIM state allows a preprogrammed short calibration to be performed. The calibration is short, because step attenuation levels are begun close to lock-on level. A NO GO indication signifies either a failure to lock on or lock on at a signal level higher than the required system senslvity. NAV Switch Enters the system into the NAV state.

Figure 22-28. C-l 1508Controller-IndicatorControls and Indicators (Sheet3 of 3) power circuits. Umbilical cables are permanently installed in the WS 12 and WS 15 pylons. Connectorsfor auxiliary equipment are mountedin the kick panel underthe table at the TAC/EWO station. Receptacle covers are installed on these connectors sincethe auxiliary equipmentis not normally installed. A pylon umbilical cable (muted through the pylon, out the tailcone faring, to thepod) connectspower, auxiliary, and control wiring from fhe WS bracket connectors to the pod. When not in use, theseconnectorsare stowed on dummy receptaclesmounted inside the tailconefaring. All connectionsto the pod are made using a lanyardtype, quick-releaseconnector.The landyardis a part of the umbilical cable and is connectedto the pylon during flight. This provides quick disconnect without damageshould it becomenecessaryto jettison a pod during flight. by nomenclature,part number, and location. All other parts of the AN/ALQ-170(V) system interconnectwiring are hard-mountedto the airframe.
22.9.1.7
routed

Power Distribution. Primary power is from the main load center dc limiter bus and ac bus A through the wing storespower relay to the mission circuitbnzakerpanellocatedatbay45.Poweristhenrouted t?om the AN/ALQ170 system circuit breaker(mission circuit breaker panel)throughthepressure deckconnector andthroughthe leadingedgeof eachwing to the WS 12 or WS 15bracketpower connector.

piiTo preventinjury to personnelor damageto equipment,ensureall externalstoresaresafe and use extreme carewhen applying power to the AN/ALQ-I 70 equipment.
Note

Failure to attachthe umbilical cable connector lanyardprior to flight could resultin damageto the pod, umbilical cable, andpylon. The universal pylon wiring for the AN/ALQ-170(V) system comprisesthe equipmentlisted in Figure 22-31
ORIGINAL

Unless the armament safety circuit is disabled, ac and dc power provided to the AN/ALQ-I70 circuit breakers will be deenergized when the landing gearhandleis placed in the down position (refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-2-26).

22-38

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA-1.3

22.10.2 22.10.2.1

System

Operation

VHS VCR Control. PressingCB4 on the 60-Hz circuit breakerpanelprovidespower to the60-Hz receptacleat SSl/SS2 for the VHS recorder.

1. The following controls and indicators areusedto operatethe VHS VCR from the remote control: a. POWER indicator - Flickers when an operationbutton is pressedon the remotecontrol. b. Wireless remote sensor - Receivesthe signal from the wireless remote control. c. VCR/TV selector - Selects the signal source to be monitored or recorded. Select VCR for operation with the RMS system. When VCR is selected,VCR will be shownon multifunction display. d. EJECT button stopmode. Removes a cassettein the

Figure 22-29. Dual Video Monitors The following circuit breakersapply power to the AN/ALQ-170 systemand associated pylons: a. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker;locatedat the armamentcircuit breakerpanel, forward left electronicsrack. b. WING STORES PWR RLY circuit breaker; located at the armamentcircuit breakerpanel, forward left electronicsrack.
C.

PDI SELECT circuit breaker; located at the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45.

e. Power button Turns VCR on and off. Usedto setthe VCR for unattended recordings or standbyOTRs. f. RECALL button - Displays or clears the time counter,date,time, function and channel number. g. MONITOR button - Displays the TV channelcurrently tuned.Pressagainto resumeplayback’from the still mode. h. REWIND/SEARCH button - Rewinds tapes. Also, during playback pressthis button to view the picture in rapid reverse. i. STILL ADVANCE button - Advances the picture frame-by-framein still mode for tapes recordedin SP or SLP. Also, pressthis button in playback mode to rapidly scanover several secondsof tape. j. PAUSE/STILL button - Temporarily stops tapewhile recording or to view a still picture during playback. k. REC button Records.

d. POSN 12 and POSN 15 circuit breakers,locatedat the mission circuit breakerpanelat bay
45. 22.9.2 System Operation. Operating procedures for the AN/ALQ-170 system are containedin the technical manual, operatorsinstructions, countermeasures simulator set, AN/ALQ-170(V) publication. VHS VCR EQUIPMENT Component Description

22.10 22.10.1

22.10.1.1

VHS VCR Unit. The VHS VCR is commercial equipmentthat provides training mission case storagefor radarimages obtainedby the SS3 operator. The VHS recorderis locatedat SS2because of the lack of available spaceat the SS3 console. Control and operation of the VCR unit will be performed with the remotecontrol, also locatedat the SS2 console.

22.10.1.2 Remote Control Unit. The RCU is a battery-operatedhand-held unit that provides all the controlsfor the VHS VCR. The RCU is storeddirectly abovethe VHS VCR in a recessedpanel at SS2.

1. CLOCK/COUNTER button - Selects the clock or time counter in the multifunction display.

22-39

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Sync selector switch H. AFC switch Ready jack Focus Video output connector Video input connector Video termination @NC) @NC)

urce of sync and boosts picture quality ShorVlong; selects a short or long time constant for VTR playback. Permits unit to integrate with alarm activated systems. Variable control for display focus. Permits access to system video for auxiliary use. Provides the input for the video signal. Selects the appropriate video termination impedance.

switch

Figure 22-30. Video Monitor Controls m. COUNTER MEMORY button memory stop featureon and off. Turns the r. TRACKING/V-LOCK control - Tracking control is used during playback or double speed playback if the image is partially obscuredby bandsof noise.V-lock control locks out vertical jitter in SP or SLP still mode. s. Front panel door - Slide this door down to exposethe function controls. t. VCR/TV selector - Selects the signal sourcethat your TV receives.VCR position:to view playback, to monitor video recordingsor watch TV using the VCR tuner.VCR appears in the multitimction display. TV position: to watchTV or to view oneprogramwhile recording another.When setto TV, no indicatorlights in the multifunction display.

n. CLEAR/RESET button - CLEAR button clearsthe contents of a displayedprogram.RESET button resetsthe time counterwhen it is displayed. o. BOOK MARK SEARCH button - Locates beginning of a blank portion of tape for continuous recording. p. STANDBY button - Used along with the OTR button to set delayed(standby)OTRs. q. One touch record button - Startsan instantaneousrecording from 30 minutes to 4 hours (or up to the end of the tape).Power shutoff is
automatic.

ORIGINAL

22-40

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

PDI Select Panel

I

91050137-001

I

Copilot Side Console

Figure 22-31. AN/ALQ-170(V) SystemInterconnectWiring Components u. CHANNEL UP/DOWN keys - Selectsthe desiredchannelusing the VCR tuner.Can also be used to clear or reset items in a displayed program. v. CHANNEL SEARCH button - Scanschannels assignedto the CHANNEL UP/DOWN keys. When the desiredchannelappears, press again to selectit. w. PLAY button Plays back a tape. aa. Slow-motion buttons - SLOW buttonslows motion playback of tapes recorded in SP or SLP. The up/down buttons let you adjust the speedfrom about l/5 to l/60 the normal speed. bb. REPEAT button - Repeatsplayback of a continuouslyrecordedportion of tape. cc. PROG/CLOCK button - Displays menu screen, setting clock, channel memory, and timer recording. dd. Numberedkeys (0, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, and 9) - Selectsthe VCR tuner channels.Also, use thesekeys when making a selection from an OSD. (100): Pressthis button first when selecting channels100through 125. ee. TIME/SEARCH button - Allows you to skip back or aheadon a tape. ff. ADD/DELETE button - Adds or deletesa channelfrom the currentchannelmemory.

x. FAST FORWARD/SEARCH button Rapidly advancesthe tape.Also, during playback press this button to do a rapid forward visual search. y. STOP button Stopsthe tape.

z. Double speed(X2) playbackbutton - Used during playback with tapesrecordedin SP or SLP mode to searchforward at twice the normal speed.

22-41

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

Lx. INPUT button - Pressthis button for the desired input to the VCR. Tuner, for regularTV or cable TV recording. Line, for re-recording or camera recording. TUNER or LINE will appear for a few secondson the TV screen when this button is pressed. hh. Tape speedselector(SP/LP/SLP) - Set this selectorto the desiredrecording speed:standard play, long play, or superlong play. 22.10.2.2 Multifunction Display. The MFD permits the operatorto monitor system statusindicators in all modesof operation. 1. Function Indicators - A characterdisplay in the upperleft-handcomer of the MFD andthe associated REC indicator shows the direction of tape travel and the following conditions: a. Play, double speedplay b. Rewind, rewind/search c. Fast forward, fast forward search d. Record e. Record/pause f. Still g. Slow, still advance h. Eject. 2. Cassette-in indicator - An iconic symbol between the function indicator and the REC indicator. When the symbol is not showing, there is no cassette in theVCR. When the symbol is showing, thereis a cassettein the VCR. When the symbol is flashing, automaticrewind took placeat theendof the tape during playback, recording, or fast forward. The indicator continues flashing until the next mode is selected.Also, the indicator flashes if you attempt any recording when the cassette record tab is missing. 3. TIMER indicator - Indicatesthe VCR is setfor a timer recording,standbyOTR, or instantOTR. 4. REPEAT indicator - From playback or any special effect, you can repeat playback with the REPEAT button. When you press this button, playbackcontinuesto the endof the recordedsection of the tape.The tapewill then auto rewind to ORIGINAL 2242

thebeginning of the tapeandwill repeatplayback. Pressing the REPEAT or another function will stopauto playback. 5. Speedindicator SP, LP, SLP - Showsthe tape speedduring recording or playback. 6. VCR/TV indicator VCR - Appears when the VCR/TV selectoris set to VCR. 7. Memory indicator M trol is in use. Indicatesmemory conDisplays thecur-

8. Clock/timer counterdisplay rent time or time counter.

9. Channel Display 188 - The CHANNEL numberselectedat theVCR is displayed.An L will appearwhen you selecta line input. 22.11 MD-1203/ULT AUDIO MODULATOR SYSTEM The audio modulator system consistsof two MD1203audiomodulators(Figure 22-32). Selectedmodulation signals from MD-1203 No. 1 are routed through the in-flight communicator stationAUX ICS control to the HF 1 radio (Channel 1) andHF 2 radio (Channel2). Selected modulation signals from MD-1203 No. 2 (Channel 1)are routedthroughSS1 to the mission UHF 3 andUHF 4 radiosand to USQ-113 transmitterNo. 1. Selected modulation signals from MD-1203 No. 2 (Channel2) arerouted throughSS2to the mission UHF (3 through 6) radiosand to USQ-113 transmitterNo. 2. The MD-1203 audio modulator selectablemodulating output signal types are both simple and complex wave shapes, including tone,bagpipe,noise,andmorsecode. 22.11.1 Component Description. The MD-1203 is a dualenclosureunit thathousesidenticalmodulators. The MD-1203KlLT audio modulator is a single chassis component. The chassis contains the power supply, waveform generators,amplifiers, and control circuits necessaryto provide the desired functions. Transmit control is provided from the keying circuit of the associated HF or UHF transmitter when the MODE switch is set to the JAM position. 22.11.1.1 Power Distribution. The MD-12031 ULT audio modulators require 115 Vat, 47 to 440 HZ input power. To apply power to MD-1203 NO. 1 and MD-1203 NO. 2, pressthe following circuit breakers: 1. MD-1203 No.1 circuit breaker,locatedat the forward left electronicsrack circuit breakerpanel.

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Figure 22-32. MD-1203NLT Modulator Front PanelControls and Indicators 2. MD-1203 No.2 circuit breaker,locatedat the mission power circuit breakerpanel, bay 45. 22.11.2 System Operation. The MD-1203/ULT audio modulator front panel containsall operatingcontrols and indicators. Figures 22-32 and 22-33 illustrate and define the front panel controls and indicators. All controlsand indicatorsare duplicatedfor channel1 and channel 2 except the POWER switch and VOLUME control. The MD-1203 modes of operation include the following: 1. Speakeroutput andjamming 2. Fixed frequencytones 3. White noise 4. Squarewave and sawtoothwave frequencymodulation and deviation 5. Bagpipe simulator 6. Morse code simulator. Note The simultaneous-operation lockout circuit in the dual HF system prevents keying of both HF transmittersat the sametime. 22.11.2.1 Speaker Output and Jamming. To monitor fhe modulating tone on the MD-1203 dual modulator: 1. Switch the JAM/OFF/MONITOR switch to the MONITOR position. 2. Adjust volume for a comfortable listening level. To transmit generated tones: 22-43 1. Switch theJAM/OFF/MONITOR switch to JAM. 22.1122 Fixed Frequency Tone Generation. To generatea fixed frequencytone: 1. Set TONE/BAGPIPE SELECT control to TONE 2. Rotateclockwise, oneor more offhe six GENERATOR controls to increasesignal gain (400,600, 1100,1800,3000,LINK). 3. Rotating any of the GENERATOR controls full counterclockwisewill deselectthat tone. 22.11.2.3 White Noise Generation. White noise canbegenerated separately or addedto anycombination of fixed frequencytones. 1. To enableor increasethe amplitude of noise,turn the NOISE control clockwise. 22.11.2.4 Square Wave and Sawtooth Wave Frequency Modulation and Deviation. Any of the five fixed frequenciescan be frequencymodulated anddeviatedwith a squarewaveform or sawtoothwaveform or both. 1. When operatingin the fixed frequencymode, under SQUARE WAVE and/or SAWTOOTH WAVE, rotate RATE and DEV controls clockwise. Rotating these controls clockwise will increasethe modulation and frequencydeviationto the desiredlevel. 22.11.2.5 Bagpipe Simulation. simulation: To selectbagpipe

1. SetTONE/BAGPIPE control to BAGPIPE. Fixed frequencyand LINK controls are disabled in fhe BAGPIPE mode. 2. RotateBAGPIPE RATE control to the desiredsequencingrate. ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Oi-15PAA-1.3

CONTROL SQUARE WAVE RATE DEV SAWTOOTH WAVE RATE DEV 3UTPUT LEVEL ?G Xl/x20 3ENERATORS

FUNCTION Controls square wave modulation rate to tone generators. Controls amount of square wave deviation of tone generators. Controls sawtooth wave modulation rate to tone generators. Controls amount of wave deviation of tone generations. Indicates RMS output amplitude level. A two-position toggle switch: selects meter level range control. Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls Controls amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude level level level level level level level of of of of of of of 400-Hz output in TONE mode. 600-Hz output in TONE mode. 1 lOO-Hz output in TONE mode. 1800-Hz output in TONE mode. 3000-Hz output in TONE mode. noise output in TONE mode. 2915Hz output in TONE mode.

400 600
1100 1800

3000
NOISE LINK RATE JAM/OFF/ MONITOR TONE/BAGPIPE Switch RATE MORSE ON/OFF MORSE DATA SELECT POWER VOLUME SELECT

A three-position function.

toggle switch: controls output to speaker and jamming

A two-position rotary switch: selects TONE or BAGPIPE mode. Controls rate of BAGPIPE mode sequence. A two-position toggle switch: selects MORSE CODE mode ON/OFF. A 18-pushbutton A pushbutton keypad: controls MORSE CODE mode operations. provides primary power on/off control.

switch (indicator):

Controls front panel speaker volume on channel 1 and channel 2.

Figure 22-33. MD-1203/ULT Modulator Front Panel Controls and Indicators 22.11.2.6 Morse Code Simulation. morse code: To simulate 5. To changethe WPM, pressthe asterisk(*) button, enterany two-digit numberfrom 02 to 60 andpress the crosshatch(#) button. 6. To changethe CPW, pressD, enterany two-digit number from 03 to 06 andpressthe crosshatch (#) button. 22.12 UNIVERSAL PYLON WIRING The UPW provides a means of interconnectfor the AST-4, AST-6, ALE-43, or ALQ-167 podsat the wing stationpylons. The AST-4, AST-6, ALE-43, or ALQ167podsarenot part of the EP-3J aircraftconfiguration but may be installed asauxiliary systems.WS 9,10,11, 12, 15, 16, 17, and 18 are patchedto the WW console patch panel at bay 17. The patch panel routesthe eight

1. Set the MORSE ON/OFF switch to ON for Channel 1 or Channel2. 2. To use the morse code generatorexclusively, rotate the five fixed frequencyGENERATOR controls, LINK control, and NOISE control fully counterclockwise. 3. Set TONE/BAGPIPE control to TONE. 4. At the MORSE DATA SELECT keypad,pressthe crosshatch(#) button to set the morse data at a default setting of 10WPM and 3 CPW. ORIGINAL

22-44

NAVAIR 0%75PAA.1.3

setsof UPW cablesto NAViEWO consolefor any combination of the aforementionedpods. 22.12.1 System Description. The UPW system providescontrol signalsandoperatingvoltagesbetween the wing station pod systemsand their respectivecontrollers. From the WS bracket, the pylon segmentsof both power and control wiring are routed through the pylon to the bracketpositioned inside the tailcone fairing. An umbilical cablethat is specific to the pod being used, provides connection between the pod and bofh control andpower wiring harnesses at thepylon disconnectbracket.All connectionsto the pod aremadeusing a lanyard type, quick-disconnectconnector. The lanyard is a part of the umbilical cableand is connectedto thepylon during flight. This enables quick release without damage,should it becomenecessary to jettison the pod in flight. The selectedsystemcontroller connectsto a rearconsolebracketusing anadaptercablethat is peculiarto the controller. There are four WS patch panels supporting eight UPW connectorsets(IUPW through SJF’W and 8UPW through IOUPW), locatedat NAV/EWO in support of the pods. From the rear console bracket, the control wiring is routed to the patch panel at bay 17, whereconnectionsaremadeto the desiredwing station UPW or a dummy receptacle.The wing station wiring is routed from the patch panel to the pressuredeck and out throughthe leadingedge,to eachof the wing station bracketpower connectors. 22.12.2 Power Distribution. Primary power is providedto the mission circuit breakerpanel,at bay 45, from the main load center(dc limiter busand ac busA), via the wing stores power relay (ref. NAVAIR Ol75PAA-2-26). The control voltage for the wing stores power relay is supplied from the ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breakerlocatedat the forward left electronicsrack circuit breakerpanel. Eachwing station is supplied power from a IO-amp ac circuit breaker and a IO-amp dc circuit breakeron the mission circuit breakerpanel.The powerwiring for each wing station is routed from the mission circuit breaker panelto thepressuredeck connector.From the pressure deckconnector,the power wiring is thenroutedthrough fhe leadingedge,to eachof the six wing stationbracket power connectors.

handleis placedin the down position, unless the armament safety circuit is disabled (ref. NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-2-26). Proper measuresshouldbetakento preventpossibledamageto equipmentor injury to personnel. 22.12.3 System Operation. An adapter and umbilical cable,peculiar to the systembeing connected,is used to complete the interconnectat both the console and the pod. When not in use, thesecablesshould be stowedsafely inside fhe aircraft. The ALE-43 is the only controller that must be connectedto a specific rearconsolebracket.This is because of fhe 5-volt lighting power requirementthat is provided only at 9UPW and IOUPW. Thesebracketsarelocated at the lower aft NAV console area and are the only bracketsthat faceforward, ratherthaninboard.All other rear consolebracketshave 18-volt lighting provisions. All other auxiliary controllers may be installed at any position.

ALE-43 controllersthatareconnected to rear console brackets other than 9UPW and 1OUPWmay be damaged. Note The 18-volt receptaclesat NAV/EWO console are placardedwith a CAUTION statement to preclude installing an ALE-43 controller at thesepositions. The system controller in use mateswith rearconsole bracketJ2 andJ3 connectorsusing an adaptercablethat is system peculiar. The J3 connector is used only for controller lighting. Control signals &om rear console bracket52 connectorare routed to the P4 connectoron the patch panel. Any of the eight rear consolebracket P4 connectorscan be mated with any of the six wing station 54 connectors.This allows up to 48 different configuration possibilities, but only six may be connectedat onetime. Control signalsfrom the patchpanel 54 connectorare routedto the JSpressuredeckconnector. The control signals are then routed !?om the PS pressure deckconnectorto theWS bracket57connector. Signals from WS bracketP7 connectorare thenrouted throughfhepylon to the J9 connectorlocatedinside the tailcone fairing. Connectionsare then made from J9 to the system pod with the appropriateumbilical cable.

During normal in-flight operations,acanddc power provided to the UPW circuit breakers may be deenergizedwhen the landing gear 22-45

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA.1.3

To apply power to the wing station pylons, closethe applicablecircuit breakerslocatedat the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. Providing a variablePRF for theAN/APS-80 radar posesa significant risk of damageto the radar equipment.Ensurethat only qualified personneloperatethis equipment. Failure to attachthe umbilical cableconnector lanyardprior to flight could resultin damageto the pod, umbilical cable, and pylon. 22.13 B2 RADAR SIMULATOR SYSTEM The B’ Radar Simulator System (B*) is a pulse generatorwith unique PRF characteristics.Output impedance,pulse amplitude, pulse width, rise time, and load driving capability arecomparablewith requirementsof the AN/APS-80 radarsystem.The B* provides outputs to trigger the FMS indicator and both radarmodulators to alter the normal radiating characteristics of the AN/APS-80 radar. The B* system B* control selects either the normal AN/APS-80 PRF of 390 to 420 PPS or an alteredPRF. This is accomplishedby routing the two requiredoutputsfrom the SN-234/APS-80synchronizer through a relay in the unit. Therefore, no cable reconfiguration is required during flight. Cable provisions for the B* control are located at SS3 consoleand for the FEWSG B* unit at bay 11. 22.13.1 Component Description. The equipment asinstalledin theEP-3J,interfaceswith the ANlAPSradarsystemandconsistsoftheB*controllocatedat SS3 and the B* unit locatedat bay 11. 22.13.1 .l B2 Control. The B* control box consists of a six-position pushbuttonswitch assemblywith illuminated caps. The switches are mechanically interlocked so that the one pushedlast remains pressedand all othersarereleased.The capsare independentlyilluminated to indicate status. 22.13.1.2 B2 Simulator. Modifications have been incorporatedto the B2 unit to accept an external PRF trigger from an SG-1189/AST-4 control. This permits the PRF of the APS-80 to be varied in flight. A BNCtype connector and a toggle switch have been added to the top of the B* unit. When operated in the B2 mode, the INT position of the switch selectsthe usual B* output signal. The EXT position selects the variable PRF provided by the SG-1189/AST-4 control via the BNC connector. 22.13.2 8’ Control Functions, Controls, and Indicators. The six switchescan be divided into two groups;the left threeareassociated with the radarmode and the right three are associatedwith the simulation mode. For control settingsandfunctions,refer to Figure 22-34. 22.13.3 Power Distribution. To apply power to the B* radarsimulator system,pressthe 28-Vdc B2 circuit breaker,locatedat themission circuit breakerpanel. 22.13.4 System Operation. With the B* control in NORM (radarmode), signals are routedunintenupted throughthenormally closedcontactsofrelays insidethe unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulseis routedfrom SN-234/ APS-80 radar synchronizer to the B* unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse then is routedfrom the B* unit to both the forwardandaftradarmodulators(in parallel).SYNC signalsarerouted from SN-234/APS-80radarsynchronizer to the B* unit. The SYNC signals arethen routed from the B2 unit to the C-12272 (RMS indicator). With the BZ control in simulation mode, SYNC signals and the MOD TRIGGER pulse are outputted directly to the forward and aft radarmodulatorsandto the RMS indicator. Do not alter PRF on AU-4 control box during RF transmissionas damageto equipmentmay occur. 22.14 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR STATION The in-flight communicator is responsible for the properpreflight andoperationof all equipmentassigned to him. The primary mission of the in-flight communicatoris to operateHF 1,HF 2, andHF 3 communication systemsasdirectedby themission commander.As configured on this model aircraft, HF 1 and HF 2 may transmit and receive voice audio or MD-1203 modulated audio. HF 3 is an HF scannermonitored on the AUX ICS. The in-flight communicator can monitor UHF 1,UHF 2, V/UHF, HF 1,HF 2, MAIN ICS left and right audio, and MD-1203 left and right audio on the

ORIGINAL

22-46

NAVAIR Ol-l!iPAA-1.3

CONTROL Radar Mode (LH three switches) OFF

FUNCTION The radartransmitteris inhibited,trigger pulse is removedfrom the modulator. Used duringtransitionfrom normal AN/APSJO parametersto simulated parameters. Operatorsees two distinct
When radar is turned on, it will operate in normal parameters. It is

is switch is pushed in conjunctionwith one of the RH three , and the radar is operating, itwill radiate in simulated

Figure 22-34. B2 Control Function Select Switches AUX ICS. The in-flight communicatormay alsoreceive andtransmitonUHF l,UHF2,V/LJHF,HF 1,andHF 2 systemsasselectedon the masterICS control. He will also requestthe position report 10 minutes prior to the time the report is due, authenticate/challenge messages, maintain radio logs as directed by the communications doctorine/controllingactivity, and act asan observeras directed.He will alsobe requiredto scanfor, andtarget, mission specific frequencies as directed by the TAC/EWO. Additionally, he shall be preparedto transmit emergencymessages at any time. 22.14.1 WJ-8718 HF 3 Scan Receiver Control. HF 3 comprisesaWJ-8718Ascanreceiverandanactive bladeHF antennafor standalone operation. HF 3 audio is accessibleto the operatoron the AN/AK-22 system andfhe AUX ICS system. 22.14.1.1 Component Description. The WJ-8718A HF receiveris designedto receive and demodulateRF tiequencies in the 5-kHz to 29.999~MHz range. The receiver can be tuned in the local mode by using the generalpurposekeypad or the tuning wheel. The WJ8718AiMFP (microprocessorfront panel)option allows local digital control of all HF 3 receiver parameters while providing accessto 100 programmablememory channels.Local control of the receiveris accomplished through momentaty-contact pushbutton switches ar22.47 ranged in functional blocks on the WJ-8718AiMFP front panel. 22.14.1.2 Power Requirements. Applypowerto the WJ-8718A scanreceiverand associated antennaby pressingthe DC HF 3 and WJ-8718 PRE-AMP circuit breaker,locatedat the forward left electronicsrack circuit breakerpanel. 22.14.1.3 Operation. Receiver operating parameters areenteredon the MFP switchesand transferredto the receiverautomatically. Parameterscan be storedin a memory using the STORE switch, andtransferredto the receiver from memory using fhe RECALL switch. There are four selectableparameters:detection mode, IF bandwidth, RF gain (MGC only), and gain mode. 22.14.1.3.1 Detection Mode. Detection modes are selectedby the AM, FM, USB, LSB, ISB, CWV (variable), and CWF (fixed) pushbuttons.The CWV switch is associatedwith the BFO switch and must be engagedto establish a new BFO frequency in the addressedreceiver. In the AM, FM, and CW modes,the line audio and phonesaudioaretakenfrom the receiver’sAM, FM, and CW detectors,respectively. One of the five available bandwidths can be selectdd for AM, FM, and CW ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

modes. The CWV switch enablesthe variable BFO. The CWF switch enablesthe fixed BFO (455 kHz). In the ISB mode, USB and LSB audios are available and canbe monitored with stereoheadphones. 22.14.1.3.2 IF Bandwidth. The IF BANDWIDTH/ kHz switch block allows selection of .3, 1, 3.2, 6, and 16 kH.zIF bandwidths.In the AM, FM, and CW detection modes, any one of the five bandwidths should be selected.Bandwidth selectionis ineffective in theUSB, LSB, and ISB detectionmodes,when a sidebandfilter bandwidthof approximately3 kHz is assumed. To indicate this, the LED on the 3.2 kH.z IF bandwidth will glow. 22.14.1.3.3 Gain Mode. The GAIN MODE switches are MGC (manual gain control), SLOW (AGC), and FAST (AGC). The differences in decay times of fast AGC andslow AGC make them useful for differentkinds ofsignals. In thefastAGC mode,thegain ofthe receiveradjustsaboutasquickly for arise in signal strength (attack time) as it does for a fall in signal strength(decaytime). Fast AGC attack and decaytime is approximately 15milliseconds for each. In the slow AGC mode, attack time is also fast, but decay time is approximately 2 secondsslower. For AM and FM signals, the total power in the carrier and sidebandsdoes not vary much with time at the transmitter.The main purpose for AGC is to compensatefor atmospheric losses; therefore, fast AGC is best for AM and FM signals.For pulsedsignals,suchastelegraphyandsingle sidebandvoice signals, there are rapid fluctuations in transmittedpower with recurringpeaks.When this type of signal is received, it is desirablethat AGC attacks quickly and decaysslowly; therefore,slow AGC is desirable for USB, LSB, and ISB signals. When it is desirableto fix the gain, to make comparisonsof signal strength,or to eliminate signalsor noise below a particular amplitude, the manual gain mode should be used.In this mode, the RF GAIN control can be engagedand should be adjusted so that the signal strengthmeter registersat the MAN SET line. 22.14.1.3.4 RF Gain Control. When the receiver is in the MGC mode, rotating the RF GAIN control clockwise approximates a linear increasein receiver gain. To obtain the greatest latitude for signal level change,engagethe SIGNAL STR meter switch and set the gain control for an indication at the MAN SET mark on the meter. 22.14.1.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. To remove power to the HF 3 system in an emergency situation, pull the DC HF 3 and WJ-8718 PRE-AMP

circuit breaker,located at the forward let? electronics rack circuit breakerpanel. Each 22.14.2 AN/ARC-190 HF Radio System. AN/ARC-190 system comprises an RT-1341/ARC190(V) receiver/transmitter,a C-10828/ARC-190(V) control, an MT-6142AIARC-190(V) mount/modulator, a lightning arrestor,and a CU-2275/ARC-190(V) antenna coupler.There are two HF radio systems,HF 1 and HF 2. HF 1 and HF 2 audio is accessibleon the AN/AIC-22 system and the AUX ICS control unit. 22.14.2.1 Component Description 22.14.2.1.1 Receiver/Transmitter RT-1341 (V)3/ARC-190(V). There are two R/T’s: HF 1 is locatedat bay 43 and HF 2 is located at bay 15. The R/T transmits and receiveson any one of 280,000 frequencies spacedat loo-Hz increments.Frequenciesare derived from a temperaturecompensated crystal oscillator and digital frequency synthesizer.The receiver section uses dual conversion with crystal bandpassfilters to decrease effects from stronginterferencesignals,Operating modes, frequency, volume, squelch, and preset channelare microprocessor-controlledby inputs from the radio setcontrol. In transmit, the radio setis capable of delivering 400-watts peak envelopepower or 400watts average power with a continuous duty cycle. Power-amplifier circuits are automatically protected from overload, short circuit, and overheatby built in protectioncircuits. The receiverandtransmitterareboth automatically tunedto the samefrequency.The receiver is tuned by the fast-lock synthesizerin 10 milliseconds or less. Typically, the transmitter tunes to a manuallyselectedfrequencyin 1 secondand to a presetchannel frequency in 35 milliseconds. One conventional tune cycle is required for the system to respondto the code for a presetchannelfrequency. 22.14.2.1.2 Control Panel C-10828(V)2/ARC190(V). Both radio setcontrols @IF 1 and HF 2) are located at the IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR console.The radio setcontrol hassix operatingmodes:UV, LV, UD, LD, AM, and CW. The 280,000 frequencies and six operatingmodes are selectedby the radio set control. The control also containsa seven-step volume and three-step squelch control as well as a self-test switch and system fault indicator lights. Tuning and operationinformation is transmittedto the R/T through serial ASCII control words at RS-422 signal levels and a 9600-baudrate. 22.14.2.1.3 Antenna. Each HF system uses one long-wire antenna.The antennasare attachedbetween the vertical fin and the fuselage.A lightning arrestoris

ORIGINAL

22-48

NAVAIR 0%‘ISPAA-I.3

placed between the antennaand the antennacoupler. Maintenanceon the HF antennasshould be performed using instructionscontainedin NAVAIR 0 l -75PAA-27. 22.14.2.1.4 Antenna Coupler CW2275(V)2/ARC190(V). There are two antennacouplers: HF 2 is located at bay 15 and HF 1 is located at bay 42. The antennacoupler consistsof two basic casestructures:a sealedcontrol compartment,anda pressurized tunerassembly. The tuner assembly is pressurizedat 8 to 9 poundsper squareinch using dry nitrogen. This preventspossiblearcing at high altitude,providesa cooling medium, andpreventscorrosiveelementsfrom entering the unit. Microprocessordevicesdigitally tune the coupler to provide impedancematching betweenthe R/T and long-wire antenna.This allows maximum power transferfrom the R/T to the antenna.The coupler uses no mechanical components(motors, variable coils, or variable capacitors).This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance.The digital impedancematching network is made up of fixed coils and capacitorsselected by high-voltagevacuum relays,This allows frequencies to be selectedat a very high speed. 22.14.2.2 Power Requirements. Both HF systems are supplied 115Vat, 400 Hz, three-phase power: HF 1 from the monitorable essentialAC bus, monitorable essentialdc; andHF 2 from main AC bus A, monitorable essential dc. The KY-75 system is supplied 28-Vdc power from the monitorable essentialDC bus, flight station electrical load center.To apply power to HF 1 and HF 2 the following circuit breakers: 1. RT-134l/ARC-190 HF 1circuit breakers, locatedat forwardright electronics rack circuit breakerpanel. 2. HF 2 circuit breakers,locatedat forward left electronics rack and armamentcircuit breakerpanels (communications). 22.14.2.3 Operation. Both HF systems operate identically in plain communication mode. Power is applied to the HF system when the TAKE CMD/OFF switch on the radio set control is set to TAKE CMD. The chassispower supply generates all the voltagesrequiredforthe R/T, radio setcontrol, andantenna coupler. The R/T has three main functions: control, reception, and transmission. The control function encompasses both receiveand transmit. In the receivemode, the R/T translatesincoming RF signals in the range of 2.000 MHz to 29.999 MHz to audio. In the transmit mode, audio modulates an RF carrier signal in the same frequencyrange. Control of the R/T is provided by an external radio set control that supplies frequency,mode, presetchan-

nel, volume, andsquelchdatain serial format. This data is receivedby control circuitry in the m that provides bidirectional serialcommunicationsdatawith a compatible antennacoupler. The R/T storesthe presetchannel information andcontrols othermodule functions within the WT via parallel datalines. In the EP-3J AN/ARC-190(V) HF installation, SIMOP lockout relaysandRC time delaycircuits incorporatedinto the dual I-IF system preventboth tmnsmitters from being transmittedat the sametime. When HF 1 or HF 2 is keyed, the RC time delay will not permit the radio to transmit for approximately30 milliseconds. This allows the coax relay of the oppositesystem time to actuateandconnectthe coupler to a dummy load. HF PTT key, MIC audio, and receive audio signals are routed to and from the m through the AUK or master ICS control as selectedby the in-flight communicator. The PTT key and MIC audio lines are also routed to the AUX ICS control where the MIC select switch routes the signals to either the HF-MIUMD1203 selectswitch or through the AIC-22 ICS adapter to themasterICS control. For more information on MD1203 operationwith the HF system, refer to the E 31203paragraph22.12 in this chapter. Two MMT33H transfotmers, Tl andR in eachsystem @IF 1 andHF 2), provide impedance matchingbetween the ISO-ohm audio ports for the RT-134l(V)3/ARC190(V) R/T and the 600-ohm AIC-22 ICS system. An F-1629/AGC-9 acousticalfilter is installed in the MIC audio line of both HF 1 andHF 2 to attenuate low-level signals (300 to 3500 Hz). The PTT discrete is routed from the in-flight communicator’sred handset,through the SAJB, NSA AID unit, through normally open contacts of relay Kl (at the in-flight communicator’s station). From the in-flight communicator’s station relay Kl, the PIT discreteis routedto the HF 1 R/T. RX audio (C) is routed from HF 1 R/T, throughimpedance matchingtransformerT2 andthroughnormally open contactsof relay Kl (at the in-flight communicator’s station) to the NSA AID unit. The RX audio (C) signal then is routed from the NSA AID unit, through the SAJB to the KY-75 processor.RX audio (P) is returnedto the NSA AID unit andthenroutedthroughthe SAJB to the in-flight communicator’s red handset. 22.14.2.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. TO remove power from either HF system in an emergency situation pull the following circuit breakers: 1. RT-1341/ARC-190 HF 1 $A, $B, and $C circuit breakers,locatedat forwardright electronic’srack circuit breakerpanel. ORIGINAL

22-49

NAVAIR

Ul-TSI’AA-I.3

2. HF 2 $A, QB, and +C circuit breakers,located at fonvard left electronicsrack andarmamentcircuit breakerpanels (communications). 22.14.3 MD-1203/lJLT Audio Modulator. T h e MD-1203/LTLTaudio modulator No. 1, installed at the in-flight communicatorstation,supportsHF 1 and HF 2 radios. Channel 1 output is connected to HF I radio and channel2 output is connectedto HF 2 radio. 22.14.3.1 Component Description. The MD-1203 audio modulator is a dual enclosureunit that houses identical modulators.The single unit audiomodulatoris a single-chassis configuration.The chassiscontainsthe power supply, waveform generators,amplifiers, and control circuits necessaryto provide the desired functions.The selectedaudiomodulation signal andkey line areroutedthroughthe AUX ICS control unit. The AUX ICS control unit routeseachchanneloutput to the correspondingHF transmitter. A centerOFF position of the AUX ICS control HFMD-1203 TX SEL switches inhibit transmissionin either mode. 22.14.3.2 Power Requirements. The audio modulatorissupplied 1lSVac,400-Hzpowerfromthemonitorable essentialAC bus. To apply power to the audio modulator, pressthe MD-1203 circuit breaker,located at the forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel. 22.14.3.3 Operation. The audio modulator output signalsconsistofboth simple andcomplexwave shapes, including: tone, bagpipe, noise, and morse code. The control function is the keying circuit for the associated HF or UHF transmitterwhen the MODE switch is setto theJAM position. The audiomodulator front panelcontains all operatingcontrols and indicators. All controls andindicators areduplicated for channel 1 and channel 2 exceptthe POWER and VOLUME control. 22.14.3.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. TO remove power from the audio modulator in an emergency situation, pull the MD-1203 circuit breaker,locatedat the forward left electronicsrack circuit breaker panel. 22.14.4 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-162. VHF/ UHF system communication may be monitored on the AUX ICS control section. In-flight communicator may transmit and receivecommunication on VHF/UHF via the AN/AIC-22 AUX ICS mastercontrol unit. For additional information on normal V/UHF operation,refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-I. 1 Section VIII, Chapter 10.

22.14.5 UHF System AN/ARC-159. UHF 1 and UHF 2 systemcommunicationmay be monitored on the AUX ICS control (refer to the AUX ICS section of this chapter).In-flight communicator may transmit and receive communication on UHP 1 and UHF 2 via the AN/AIC-22 mastercontrol unit. 22.15 TAClEWO STATION Aside from crew coordinationand tactical planning, the TAC/EWO operates mission peculiarradio systems. As configured on this model aircraft, the TAC/EWO stationmay transmit andreceivevoice audio on UHF 3 through UHF 6, ECM 1, and ECM 2 radios using the AUX ICS control unit. TAC/EWO may transmit and receive on UHF 1 securevoice system or SATCOM securevoice systemusing the securehandset(selected at the TAtYEW station). TAG’EWO can monitor V/UHF, UHF I, UHF 2, and MAIN ICS left and right audio on the AUX ICS control unit (all other functions are not connected).In addition, TAtYEW may transmit and receive on HF 1, HF 2, V/UHF, UHF 1, and UHF 2 radio systemsusing the master ICS controls. 22.151 AN/ARC-l59 UHF 2 Radio System. The UHF 2 AN/ARC-l59 radio system comprises an RT1150receiver/transceiver, a C-9816control unit, andan MT-4658 mount. The AN/ARC-l59 communications system is a solid-stateUHF R/T that provides two-way amplitude-modulateddouble-sideband,full carrier radio communication. The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on arty one of 7,000 frequencies,spaced 25-kHz apartin the225.000to 399.975MHz frequency range. The radio is also capable of guard frequency reception.The guardreceivermodule is a self-contained fix-tuned receiverset to 243.000MHz and can operate simultaneouslywith the main receiver. 22.15.1.1 Component Description 22.15.1.1.1 RT-llSO/ARC-159(V) Receiver/ Transmitter. The RT-II50 UHF 2 R/T has a frequencyrangeof225.0 to 399.975MHz, spaced25 kHz apart.Power output is approximately10 watts, Any 1 of 20 presetchannelsor any 1 of 7,000frequencies may be selectedfrom the C-9816 control unit. The R/T is locatedat bay 44. 22.15.1.1.2 MT-4659/ARC-159(V) Mount. T h e MT-4658 mount is a nonconnectotized mount thatholds the RT-1150R/T, securedby bullet type pins at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All R/T interface is wired directly to the connectors,located at the rearof the R/T unit. The MT-4658 mount is located at bay 44.

ORIGINAL

22-50

NAVAR 0%75PM-1.3

22.15.1.1.3 AT-256AIARC Blade Antenna. UHF 2 usesa blade antennalocatedon the upper fuselageat FS 684. 22.15.1.1.4 C-9816/ARC-159(V) Control Unit. The C-9816UHF 2 control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operator to select READ, PRESET, MANUAL, and GUARD frequency operationand selects associated R/T’s for operation.The control unit is locatedat the TAC/EWO console. 22.15.1.2 Power Requirements. UHF 2 system is supplied28-vdc power from the monitorableessential DC bus.To apply power to the UHF 2 system,pressthe following circuit breakers: 1. MONITORABLE ESSENTIAL DC BUS circuit breaker, located at the forward electrical load center. 2. ARC-159 UHF NO. 2 circuit breakers,locatedat the forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel. 22.15.1.3 Operation. The UHF 2 system operates in conjunction with the AN/AIC-22 ICS system and associatedAUX ICS control. The UHF radio set also operates“standalone”, in the event of an ICS system failure. Operationof the AN/ARC-l59 UHF 2 radio set includes preset operation, manual operation, CLEAR voice transmission,and emergencyGUARD operation. 22.15.1.3.1 Plain Voice Operation. To transmit on UHF 2, the masterICS control MIC SEL switch must be set to UHF 2. The microphonekeyline is distributed throughthe FNIB to the UHF MIC control relay (KS). The UHF MIC control relay is actuated,applying a ground to the transceiver, keying the RII: Transmit voice MIC audio signals from the AIC-22 system are distributed,via the F-1629/AGC acoustical filters and theICS isolation box (Al 50). to the Rff for modulation. To monitor UHF 2 receive audio, selectthe UHF 2 receiveswitch on the master ICS control unit. Receive audio originatesat the R/T asunattenuated audio and is distributedto the UHF 1control unit in the flight station for volume control. The audio line is a 600ohm impedance line. The receive audio signal is then interfaced with the AIC-22 system. 22.15.1.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. I n the event of an ICS failure, a microphoneand handset can be plugged into jacks on the front of the RT11SO/ARC-l59 R/T for radio communicationpurposes. To remove power from the UHF 2 system during an emergencysituation, pull the ARC-159 UHF NO. 2

circuit breakemon the forward right electronicscircuit breakerpanel. 22.15.2 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-182. VHF/ UHF systemcommunication may be monitored on the AUX ICS control TAC/EWO may transmit andreceive communication on VHF/UHF via the AN/AIC-22 master control unit. For additional information on normal V/UHFoperation,refer toNAVAIROl-75PAA-I.1 Settion VIII, Chapter10. 22.15.3 ANIUSQ-113 ECM 1 AND ECM 2 Countermeasures System. TAC/EWO may transmit andreceive communication on ECM 1 and ECM 2 (locatedat C2W 1 andC2W2), via the AUX ICS unit while theMIC SEL switch is in the AUX position. For control settingson the AUX ICS system,refer to the AUX ICS sectionin this chapter. 22.16 C2W STATIONS 1 AND 2 C2W station’s 1 and 2 operators’primary mission is to detect, classify, and report contact data, and record audio information for mission reconstruction. They shall ensurea chronological log is kept for reconstruction, debrief and postex messageuse.The C2W operator’s will also operatemission-peculiar radio system9 UHF-3 through UHF-6, EA 1,EA 2, and the MD-1203 modulator. As contigured on this model aircraft, the C2W 1operatormay transmit andreceivevoice audioor MD-1203 modulated audio on UHF 3, UHF 4, EA 1, andEA 2 (MD-1203 modulated input to EA 1 andEA 2 is selectedontheUSQ-113), viathe AUX ICScontrol unit. C2Wl can monitor UHF 5, UHF 6, MD-1203 modulatedaudioinput, andmain ICS left andright audio on the AUX ICS control unit (all other functionsarenot connected).In addition, C2Wl and 2 may transmit and receiveon HF 1, I-IF 2, andV/UHF radio systemsusing the masterICS controls. 22.16.1 UHF Controls. Available functions at C2W 1 and2 for mission UHF radiosareUHF 3 through UHF 6, receiveaudio selectionto left ear(RX LEFT) or right ear (RX RIGHT) and for UHF 3 throughUHF 6 MIC TX switchesused for voice transmission. UHF 3 and UHF 4 MD-1203 TX switchesusedfor modulated audio transmission (C2Wl), UHF-5 and 6, MD-1203 TX switches for C2W2. C2Wl can also transmit key dataon UHF 3 andUHF 4, (C2W2 on UHF 5 andUHF 6) while the AUX mode is deselected. 22.16.1.1 EA No. 1 and No. 2 Controls. C2Wl may transmit or receive on either EA system. To transmit MD-1203 key data, refer to EA 1 controls in this chapter.

22-51

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

22.18.2 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-182. C2W operatorsmay transmit and receive communication on V/UHF’ via the AN/AIC-22 master control unit. For additional information on normal V/UHF operation,refertoNAVAIROl-75PAA-1.1 SectionVIII, Chapter10. Note UHF 3 and UHF 4 may be modulated by MD-1203 or voice by C2Wl. UHF 5 and UHF 6 may be modulated by MD-1203 or voice by C2W2 with main ICS selectedon MIC SEL switch (AUX ICS controlbox) and C2WKqW2. Operators may be unawareof outgoing transmissions. 22.18.3 ANIARC-159 UHF 3 through UHF 8 Radio System. The UHF 3 through UHF 6 AN/ARC159 radio systems each comprise an RT-1150 R/T, a C-9816control unit, andan MT-4658 mount. The communications system is a solid stateUHF R/T that provides two-way, amplitude-modulated, double-sideband, full carrier radio communication. The radio setpermits transmitting and receiving on any oneof 7,000frequenciesspaced25 kHz apartin the 225.000to 399.975MHz frequency range. The radio is also capable of guard tiequency reception. The guard receiver module is a self-containedfix-tuned receiver set to 243.000 MHz and can operatesimultaneouslywith the main receiver. Any one of 20 preset frequencies or any one of the 7,000 frequencies within the range of the radio may be selected. 22.18.3.1 Component Description 22.18.3.1.1 RT-llSO/ARC-159(V) Receiver/ Transmitter. The RT-1150 UHF 1 R/T has a frequency range of 225.000 to 399.975 MHz, spaced25 kHz apart.Poweroutputis approximately 10watts. Any oneof 20 presetchannelsor any one of 7,000 frequenciesmay be selectedfrom the C-9816control unit. The RT-1150RjT is locatedat bay 17. 22.18.3.1.2 MT-4858/ARC-1596) Mount. The MT-4658 mount is anonconnectorized mount that holds the RT-1150 R/T, securedby bullet type pins at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All WT interface is wired directly to the connectors,locatedat the rear of the R/T mount. The MT-4658 mount is locatedat bay 17. 22.18.3.1.3 AT-258AIARC Blade Antenna. UHF 3 andUHF 4 useblade antennas locatedon the tiselage at FS 388 upper andFS 1010lower, respectively.

22.18.3.1.4 C-9818/ARC-159(V) Control Unit. The UHF control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operatorto selectREAD, PRESET, MANUAL, and GUARD frequencyoperationand selectsassociated R/T’s for communication or navigation operation.The UHF 3 andw 4 control unit is located at the C2W 1 console. 22.18.3.2 Power Requirements. UHF 3 through 6 systems are supplied 28-Vdc power from the main load centerDC limiter bus.To apply power to both UHF systems,pressthe following circuit breakers: 1. UHF NO. 3 circuit breaker,mission circuit breaker panel. 2. UHF NO. 4 circuit breaker,mission circuit breaker panel. 3. UHF NO. 5 circuit breaker,mission circuit breaker panel. 4. UHF NO. 6 circuit breaker,mission circuitbreaker panel. 22.18.3.3 Operation. The UHF 3 through UHF 6 systemsoperatein conjunctionwith theAN/AK-22 ICS system and associatedAUX ICS control. Tbe UHF radio set also operates“standalone”,in the event of an ICS system failure. Operation of the AN/ARC-l59 UHF radio set includespresetoperation,manual operation, CLEAR voice transmission, and emergency GUARD operation. 22.18.3.3.1 Plain Voice Operation. To monitor UHF 1 or UHF 2 receive audio, selectthe desiredUHF radio receive switch on the ICS master control unit. Receiveaudio originatesat the transceiverasunattenuatedaudio and is distributed to the UHF control unit at the C2Wl consolefor volume control. The audio line is a 600 ohm impedanceline. The receive audio signal is then distributed to the AK-22 system. To operatethe UHF 3 through UHF 6 systemusing the AUX ICS control, refer to the AUX ICS sectionof this chapter. 22.18.3.32 MD-1203 Modulator Operation. Audio from the MD-1203 modulator is routed through the audio distribution panel, through a matching transformer, to the associated AUX ICS control unit, and to the R/T for modulation.

ORIGINAL

22-52

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

22.16.3.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. In the event of an KS failure, a microphone andhandset can be plugged into jacks on the front of the RT-llSO/ARC-159 R/T for radio communication purposes. To remove power from UHF systemsduring an emergencysituation, pull the UHF NO. 3 , 4, 5, or 6 circuit breakeron the mission circuit breakerpanel. 22.16.4 AN/USQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures System. The ANRTSQ-113(V) radio countermeasures systemprovidesboth fixed-frequencyandfrequency-agileradio communications capability as well asradio frequencybandESM, andEA capability.In the EA and ESM modes,the system providescommunications monitoring capability or jamming capability against single-channel fixed-frequency or slow frequency-hopping communications in the HF, VHF, andUHF frequencyranges.When not being usedin the EAiESM mode, the systemmay be operatedas a standard radio for conventional communications or as an antijam radio for ECCM communications.The two radio communication modes are referredto as COMM-1 and COMM-2, respectively. Two ANNSQ-I 13 systems are installed on the EP-3J. System No. 1 is controlled and operated from CZW Station 1 (CZWI). System No. 2 is controlled and operatedfrom C2W Station2 (C2W2). 22.16.4.1 Component Description 22.16.4.1.1 USQ-113 Operator Control. The USQ-113 operatorcontrol is a microprocessorcontmlled system interface that processescommandsentered from the controllers keypad. Systemstatusinformation is shownon the front paneldisplay andhardcopy information is provided from the front panel printer. 22.16.4.1.2 C-12159 System Controller. The C12159system controller interfacesto the operatorcontrol and executes commands via a microprocessor internalto the unit. The systemcontrollerexecutes commandsfor the following modes of operation:EA/ESM scanning,COMM-2 Anti-Jam, COMM-1 Communications, and Self-Test functions. 22.16.4.1.3 RT-1647 Receiver/-Transmitter. The RT-1647 R/T provides frequency coverage from 20 MHz to 500MHz. The R/T is a scanningtransceiverthat permits rapid scanning of multiple 25 kHz frequency channels,and reports detectedsignals to the operator control. The R/T for systems No. 1 and 2 locatedat bay 18. 22.16.4.1.4 AM-7434 High-Power AmplifTer. The HPA acceptsFM and AM signal frequenciesfrom the Rff and amplities to a power level of 400 watts (FM) 22-53

and 100 watts (AM). The HPA contains a directional couplerthat detectsforward andreflectedpower.Signal direction statusis returnedto the operatorcontrol unit. The HPA for systemsNo. 1 and 2 locatedat bay 18. 22.16.4.1.5 AS-4242, AS-4243, and AS-4244 Antennas. The ANNSQ-113 system requires three antennas. The AS-4242 receive antennais a EdI band antenna andis locatedon theupperfuselageat FS 587.5. The transmit antennasare divided between low-band operation and high-bandoperation. The AS-4243 is a low-band antennathat operatesbetween 20 MHz and 100MHzandislocatcdonthelower fUselageatFS 723, LBL 34. The AS4244 is a high-bandantennathat operatesbetween 100 MHz and 500 MHz and is located on the lower fuselageat FS 723, RBL 34. 22.16.4.2 Power Requirements. The ANNSQ113 system is supplied 115 Vat, 400 Hz, three-phase power from MAIN AC BUS A, via the mission circuit breakerpanelat bay 45. The USQ-113 No. 1 operatorcontrol is poweredby 115Vat, phaseA. The USQ-113No. 2 operatorcontrol is poweredby 115Vat, phaseB. 22.16.4.3 Operation. Operation betweenthe units of either USQ-113 system and the relatedaircraft systems with which it interfaces is dependentupon the transmittermodulation sourceselected. 22.16.4.3.1 USQ-113 Intercommunications System Control. The ICS pathroutesaudiofrom the AUX KS control at C2W1, C2W2, and TAC/EWO stationtotbeUSQ-113s. Eachpathcaoiesthreesignals: MIC audio, PTT transmit control, and receiveaudio. Selection of ICS as the modulation source for the USQ-113s is accomplished by setting the AUX ICS MIC SEL switch to AUX position, andthe EA 1or 2 TX MIC switch to MIC position. The ICS MIC audio is routed from the C2W1, C2W2, and TAC/EWO AUX ICS control to the F-1629/AGC acoustical filter. The acousticalfilter attenuates low-level signals in the 300to 3500-Hz range. The MIC audio is routed thorn the acoustical filter to the USQ-113 operatorcontrols.The PIT line is routed from C2W1, C2W2, and TAC/EWO AUX ICS control to USQ-113 operatorcontrol. 22.16.4.3.2 USQ-113 ICS Receive Audio. Receive audio is routed from USQ- 113No. 1 operatorcontrol to the AUX ICS controls at the CZWl, C2W2, and TAC/EWO stations.Receiveaudiocanbe monitoredby setting the AUX ICS control MIC SEL switch to AUX, the EA UESM switch to EA , and the EA/FX toggle switch to the R or L position. USQ-113 receive audio ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

is routedi?oom AUX ICS control to the headset right ear speakeror headsetleft ear speakeras selected. 22.16.4.3.3 MD-1203 Modulator Operation. Modulated audio is routed from the MD-1203 modulator to the USQ-113 operatorcontrol external modulation input. The MD-1203 No. 2 is locatedbetweenC2W1 and C2W2. Channel1 modulatedaudiois routedthroughthe audiodistribution panelto USQ- 113No. 1operatorcontrol. The MD-1203 No. 2 channel2 modulatedaudio is routedthrough the audio distribution panel to USQ-113 No. 2 operatorcontrol. 22.17 RADAR OPERATOR The radaroperator’sprimary mission is to supportthe mission by utilizing radar,andIRDS systemsasdirected by the TAC/EWO to detect and analyzetargetsof operationalsignificance,andto provide radarinterceptand navigation information to the TACYEWO-NAV. The radar operatorwill also operatethe B* pulse generator control (interfaced with the AN/APS-80), and report RMS radarplot information to be recordedon the VHS VCR at C2W2. 22.17.1 Bs Radar Simulator System. TheB*Radar Simulator System (B’) is a pulse generatorwith unique PRF characteristics.Output impedance,pulse amplitude, pulse width, rise time, and load-driving capability are comparable with requirements of the AN/APS-80 radar system. The B* provides outputs to trigger the RMS indicator andboth radarmodulatorsto alter the normal radiating characteristics of the AN/APS-80 radar system. 22.17.1.1 Component Description. The equipment as installed in the EP-3J interfaces with the AN/APS-80 radarsystemand consistsof the B2 control located at the radar operatorsstation, and the B* unit located in bay 11,The B* system control selectseither the normal AN/APS-80 PRF of 390 to 420 PPS or an altered PRF. This is accomplished by routing the two requiredoutputsfrom the SN-234/APS-80synchronizer througha relay in the B2unit. Thereforeno cablereconfiguration is requiredduring flight. Cableprovisions for the B* control box are located at the radar operators consoleand for the B* unit in bay 11. 22.17.1.1.1 BZ Control Box. The B2 control box consists of a six-position pushbuttonswitch assembly with illuminated caps. The switches are mechanically interlocked so that the one pushedlast remainspressed and all others are released.The caps areindependently lit to indicate status.

22.17.1.1.2 Bz Simulator. Modifications have been incorporatedto the B2 unit to accept an external PRF trigger from an SG-I 189/AST-4 control. This permits the PRF of the APS-80 to be varied in flight. A BNC-type connector and a toggle switch have been addedto the top of the B’ unit. When operatedin the B* mode, the INT position of the switch selectsthe usual B* output signal.The EXT position selectsthe variable PRF provided by the SG-1189/AST-4 control via the BNC connector.

Providing a variable PRF for the AN/APS-80 radarposesa significant risk of damageto theradarequipment.Ensure that only qualified personneloperatethis equipment. Do not exceedPRF limitations aslisted on APS-80 Guide in the Mission Commanders notebook to prevent possible damage to equipment. Do not alter PRF on AST-4 control box during RF transmission as damage to equipmentmay occur. 22.17.1.2 Power Requirements. 28 Vdc is supplied to the B2 system from the main DC bus. To apply powerto theB’radar simulatorsystem,pressthe28 Vdc B-SQUARED circuit breaker, located at the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. 22.17.1.3 Operation. WiththeB’controlinNORM (radarmode), signalsarerouted,uninterrupted,through the normally closed contactsof relays inside the unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse is routed from SN234/APS-80 radar synchronizer to the B* unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse then is routed from B2 unit to both the forward and aft radarmodulators (in parallel). SYNC signals are routed from SN-234/APS-80 radar synchronizerto the B2 unit. The SYNC signalsthen are routed from B* unit to the C-12272RMS indicator. With the B* control in simulation mode, SYNC signals and the MOD TRIGGER pulse are output directly to the forward andaft radarmodulators,andto theRMS indicator. 22.17.1.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. To removepower from the B2 radarsimulator system,pull the 28 Vdc B-SQUARED circuit breaker,locatedat the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45.

ORIGINAL

22-54

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

22.17.2 Video Home System. The VHS VCR is commercial equipment that provides training mission case storage for radar images obtained by tbe radar operator.The VHS recorderitself is located at C2W2 becauseof the lack of available spaceat the RADAR OPERATOR console.The VCR is operatedpredominantly in record mode. Control and operation of the VCR unit should be performedwith the remote control, also locatedat the C2W2 console. 22.18 NAVlEWO STATION/STATION 8A The NAV/EWO’s primary mission is to operatethe SATCOM communication system and monitor navigation instruments. As configured for this model aircraft, the AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM transmits and receives voice audio with secure voice capabilities. The NAViEWO can monitor V/UHF, UHF 1, and UHF 2 from the AUX KS unit (all other functions are not connected). The NAViEWO may also monitor main ICS left and right audio. In addition, the NAV/EWO may transmit and receive on HF 1, HF 2, V/UHF, UHF 1, and UHF 2 radio systems using the master KS controls. 22.18.1 AN1167 SATCOM System (With Secure Voice) 22.18.2 Station 8A. The STA 8A operator’s primary mission is to operatetheALQ-170 systemand the wing storecontrol units. STA 8A has beenestablished adjacenttotheNAV/EWO’sstationbetweenFS 512and FS 533. There are two AN/ALQ-170 control units and two video monitors locatedatSTA 8A. In addition,there are six wing storescontrol unit accommodationsabove the AN/ALQ-170 systems. The wiring harnessesfor eachwing storescontrol unit is storedbehind theblankoff plate for the same.It is the responsibility of the pod operator to correctly tune and utilize the proper ECM/ESM pods as directedby the TAC/EWO or mission commander.While on station,all pod times, operating data,changesduring operationsand malfunctions shall be recordedon a log sheetin chronological format to aid in datareconstruction,debriefandpostexmessage use. 22.163 Wing Stores Control System and AN/ ALQ-170(V) System. TheCMSSAN/ALQ47O(V)l, is a tracking radar transmitter and receiver that comprise the CMSS pod, a C-l 1508/ALQ-170 controllerindicator, a video monitor, a PDI and the PDI select P:mel. The CMSS provides the capability to search, acquire, and track a target in a manner simulating the

pertomranceofenemythreats.ThemarehvoAN/ALQ-170 controller-indicatorsat STA SA, that support WS pylons at WS12 and WS15. A PDI and a PDI selectpanel are locateda the pilot and copilot stations. 22.18.3.1 Component Description. The CMSS is a three-channel, monopulseradarsystem capableof utilizing different simulations in a given frequency band.Each simulation is containedin a SEM memory card and has the potential for five operator selectable options.In addition to the simulations, the operatorcan select the navigational mode which is a standardPPI radardisplay. Note Observe all applicable cautions, warnings, and handling procedures for external wing stores as prescribed in NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-75. 22.18.3.1.1 C-11508/ALQ-170(V) Controllerindicator. The C-11508controller-indicator provides control for a specific WS pylon system (WS12 or WS 15).The controller-indicatorpermits the operatorto setthe mode of operationfor the AN/ALQ- 170pod and monitor system statusinformation. There are two controller-indicators located at STA 8A console, immediately below the dual video monitors. 22.16.3.1.2 WV-5372A Dual Video Monitors. WV-5372A dual video monitors, used to display AN/ALQ-170 radarvideo and system information, are mountedin a 19-inchrack directly abovethe controllerindicators. There are two g-inch display monitors that connectto eachAN/ALQ-170 systemandtheassociated WS pylon system (W’S12or WS15). Both monitors are high-resolutionblack andwhite video monitors. 22.18.3.f.3 ANIALQ-170 Pod. The ANIALQ-170 CMSS pod is not addressed in the scopeof this manual. for more information on system operation, tests, and equipment support, refer to the NAVAIR 163OALQ170-1. 22.18.3.1.4 UPW Wiring. The AN/ALQ-170(V) system interconnect wiring provides interconnection between: AN/ALQ-170 countermeasuressimulator pods at WS12 or WS15, video indicator and control indicator (console),auxiliary equipment,PDI and PDI select panels (pilot and copilot), ICS interface, and power circuits. Umbilical cables are permanently installed in the WS12 and WS15 pylons.

22-55

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3 available. These are SEARCH, ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISTION. In SEARCH, the antennascans in an attempt to tind a target. A joystickoperated cursoris availableto aid theoperatorin searching. The ACQUISITION mode is engagedwhen a potential target is located. If the target is not valid, the CMSS returns to the SEARCH mode. If the target is valid, the CMSS locks into the TRACK mode. In TRACK mode, the CMSS follows the target rangeand anglemovements.If the CMSS losesthe targetwhile in the TRACK mode, a condition known as BREAK LOCK occurs.The CMSS moves into theREACQUISTION mode andusesseveralmethodsto locatethe lost target.If reacquisition is not successful,the CMSS returnsto SEARCH mode. Operating proceduresfor the AN/ALQ-170 system arecontainedin the technicalmanual,operatorsinstructions, countermeasures simulator set,AN/ALQ-170(V) publication. Direct requestfor this publication to Commandine.Offtcer. Naval Air Warfare Center. Airaft Division, Indianapolis, 6000 E. 21st St, Indianapolis, IN46219-2189. 22.18.3.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. TO remove power in an emergency,pull the following circuit breakers: 1. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker located at the armament circuit breakerpanel forward left electronicsrack. 2. WING STORES PWR RLY circuit breaker,located at the armament circuit breakerpanel, forward left electronicsrack. 3. PDI SELECT circuit breaker, locatedat the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. 4. POSN 12 and POSN 15 circuit breakers,located at the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. 5. CBI circuit breaker, located at the 60 Hz circuit breakerpanel at bay 17 (dual video monitors). 22.18.3.5 RD481/A Recorder-Reproducer. See NAVAIR 0 l -75PAA-11for detailedinformation andoperatingprocedures. 22.18.3.8 ANIASN-124 System. See NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 for detailed information and operating procedures. 22.18.3.7 ANIARN-99(V) OMEGA Navigation Set. SeeNAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 for detailedinfonnation and operatingprocedures.

Failure to attachthe umbilical cable connector lanyardprior to flight could resultin damageto the pod, umbilical cable,and pylon. 22.18.3.2 Power Distribution. Primary power is suppliedfrom the main load centerdc limiter bus andac busA throughthewing storespower relayto themission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. The dual video monitors arc supplied 115Vat, 60 Hz power by the 60 Hz circuit breakerpanel at bay 17. piGiTo prevent injury to personnelor damageto equipment,ensureall externalstoresaresafe and use extremecare when applying power to the AN/ALQ-170 equipment. Note Unlessthe armamentsafetycircuit is disabled, acanddcpowerprovidedto theAN/ALQ-170 circuit breakers will be dcenergized whenthe landing gear handle is placed.in the down position (referto NAVAIR 01-75PAA-2-26). To apply power to the AN/ALQ-170 systemand associatedpylons, pressthe following circuit breakers: 1. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker located at the armament circuit breakerpanel forward let?electronicsrack. 2. WING STORES PWR RLY circuit breaker,located at the armament circuit breakerpanel, forward left electronicsrack. 3. PDI SELECT circuit breaker,located a the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. 4. POSN 12 and POSN 15 circuit breakers,located at the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. 5. CBI circuit breaker,located at the 60 Hz circuit breakerpanel at bay 17 (dual video monitors). 22.18.3.3 System Operation. During transmission of a typical simulation, four modesof operationare

ORIGINAL

22-58

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

22.16.3.6 LTN-72 Inertial Navigation System 22.16.3.6.1 Power Distribution. The LTN-72 INS utilizes 115-volt, 400 Hz, single-phaseac power pmvided by the main ac busA for normal run/heaterpower. This power is provided through two circuit breaken labeled ARINC 561 located on the forward left electronic circuit breaker panel. Twenty-six Vat power is provided for synchro excitation through the TASiINS circuit breakerlocatedon the forward navigation interconnectionbox. 22.16.3.6.2 Inertial Navigation Unit. The INU housesthe gyro stabilized inertial platform, the C-4000 digitial computer, inertial power supply, and a digital subsystem. The platform is an all attitude 2’ of t?eedom gyro stabilizedplatform usesaccelerometers asits sensing element. The basic outputs of the INU platform include pitch and roll, velocity and platform azimuth. The INU power supply converts 11S-volt, 400 Hz, single-phase, primary power into the variousregulatedand unregulateddc voltagesrequired by the system, and is capableof operatingfrom a dc supply in the event 1ISvolt power is lost. In the event of an interrupt in the 400-Hz power, the system automatically switches to a backupdc source.The systemturn-onsequence is interlockedsuchthatboth ac anddc sourcesmust bepresent. This preventsthe inadvertent dischargeof the battery and operationof the systemwithout a back dc source. The C-4000 computer is a generalpurposedigital computer. It provides all the navigational, guidance, and alignment computationsrequired at the INU as well as the integrity monitoring routines.The digital subsystem convertsthe various navigationdata from the computer to analog,binary or binary-codeddecimal format for use by other aircraft systems and the control display unit. The digital subsystemalso acceptsa true airspeedsignal from the aircraft’s true airspeedcomputerthat is usedto computewindspeedanddirection. 22.16.3.6.3 Battery Unit. The BU located in electronic bay 15suppliesnominal 24-Vdc backupandtumon power to the INS. The BU is chargedduring normal operationby the INU to 26.5 Vdc. In the event that primary 115Vat power is lost, the BU will provide operatingpower to the INS for 30 minutes or until the batterydischarges below a predeterminedlevel of 17.5 Vdc; then the INS will automatically shutdown.Excessive current drain protection is provided by a 25amp circuit breakerlocatedon the front of the BU. A battery input to the INU must be presentbeforethe LTN-72 will turn on. Once it is on and and an alignment has been completed,a failure of the primary 400-Hz input power will causethe system to revert to the backup battery sourceand the BAIT annunciatoron the CDU to light. If the backup dc sourcefalls below a usablelevel, the

BAIT annunciatoron the MSU and the INS WARN annunciatoron the CDU will illuminate. 22.16.3.6.4 Remote Compass Transmitter. The remotecompasstransmitter(ML 1)is animprovedform of wet compass utilizing a flux valve. The compass transmittercontainsagimbal-mountedflux valve sealed in a viscousfluid-tilled hemisphericalbowl. Locatedin the starboard horizontal stabilizer, it is aligned with the aircraft longitudinal axis and it comparesaircraft heading relative to local magnetic north. Excitation voltage is provided to the transmitter from the compassadapter compensator. 22.16.3.6.5 Compass Adapter Compensator. Through a complex arrangementof synchros,control transformersandservomotors,the adaptercompensator combines the magnetic heading signal from the ML-l flux valve with the platform heading signals from the INU throughthe SDC. This provides the HSI compass card with the quick responseof a gyro signal input and the long-termaccuracyof a magneticsignal input. The information from the platform heading and the flux valve is combinedandprocessed accordingto the mode selectedby the switch on the copilot compasssystem controller. Power to the compassadapter-compensator is obtained from main ac bus A by the P-3B MOD COMPADPTR circuit breakers. 22.16.3.6.6 Rate Switching Gyro. The rateswitching gyroscopeis a single degree-of-freedom gyroscope oriented to provide sensitivity aboutthe yaw axis of the aircraft. During turns at rates of ISo per minute or greater, a signal is sentto the compass-adapter compensatorthattemporarily interruptstheslaving (synchronizing) function. This allows the fast-changingazimuth signal from the gyroscopeassemblyto be unhindered by the relatively slow-changingflux valve signal during a fast tum. Power to the rate switching gyro is provided from main acbus A and from main dc throughthe P-3B COMPADPTR circuit breakers. 22.16.3.6.7 Compass System Controller. The compasssystem controller, located on the copilot side console, controls the magnetic heading output of the MX-6886/ASN-50 compass compensatoradapterthat receivesan inertial platform headingsignal via the CV3502/ASN-124signal dataconverterand flux valve output from the remote compass transmitter, ML-l. Controller selectionsaredisplayedwhenthe INERTIAL position is selectedon the HSI control-indicator in the RADIO position.It alsocontrols synchronizationofaximuth andappliesEarth-ratecompensation to thesystem. It hasno effecton inertial pitch androll signalsavailable to the copilot MM-4.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

0%75PAA-1.3

INDICATOR/CONTROL
PUSH TO SYNC Switch

FUNCTION
Causes fast synchronization (slaving) of the heading signal from the remote compass transmitter and platform heading signal from the CV-3502/ASN124 SDC. Operates in SLAVE mode only. Indicates degree of synchronization between ML-1 heading signal and signal data converter platform heading. Signal in SLAVE and COMPASS modes. Controls the phase of the Earth-rate correctional signals corresponding to either the Northern or Southern Hemisphere. Functional in SLAVE and FREE modes. Slews the compass repeater around to the desired aircraft heading. The direction of knob rotation determines the direction of heading change and the amount of knob rotation determines the speed of heading change operates in SLAVE and FREE modes.

SYNC Indicator Meter HEMISPHERE Switch INDICATOR

PUSH TO TURN L R Control

MODE Switch COMP An emergency mode to be used when the SDC platform heading signal is not available. Because of the oscillatory nature of the raw ML-I heading signal, the autopilot preselect heading feature should not be used in this mode. HSI compass cards are not as steady as in the stabilized SLAVE mode. The normal operating mode that provides a stabilized magnetic heading signal to the HSls with INERTIAL position selected on the respective navigation control panel. Heading referenced to a grid meridian rather than true north. The heading can be slewed to any desired angle with respect ot the meridian. This mode is used when employing grtd navigation techniques or in regions where the Earth magnetic field is too unreliable. DEGREES Permits changing the latitude setting to correspond with the position of the aircraft during SLAVE or FREE mode operations. The selected latitude is displayed in the window of the digital indicator and should be updated every 1’ as the aircraft changes latitude.

SLAVE

FREE

LATITUDE

Figure 22-35. CompassSystem ControllersFunctions
22.18.3.8.8 LTN-7UASN-124 Interconnection.

The LTN-72 transmits datato the ASN-124 signal data converterin the form of serial binary data.This datawill consist of true heading,INS velocity, INS position, and

waypoints. Platform azimuth in the form of synchro signals is also received by the ASN-124 signal data converterfor use in the compass adaptercompensator instabilizing magneticheading.

ORIGINAL

22-58

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

TRACK E;zWJ;;SPEED DRIFT ANGLE CROSS TRACK ;pR&;ANGLE MODE SELECT DEV

PRESENT POSITION WAYPOINTS (9) DISTANCE TO GO TIME TO GO WIND SPEED WIND DIRECTION DESIRED TRACK STATUS TEST ALERT SIG BAlT OFFR SIG WARN SIG

I
AFT NAV J BOX

%+ROLL

4 ZF
HACLS DPC r-l

A/C HEADING

PLATFORM HDG TRUE HDG INS VELOCITIES INS POSITION WAYPOINTS ATTITUDE FLAG DIGITAL DATA WARN

‘Installed “Installed

on aircraft incorporating on aircraft incorporating

AFC 404 AFC 399

cl
AN/AGC-S(V)1 TELETYPEws!J;5R

Figure 22-36. LTN-72/ASN-124 Interconnections

2249 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER

23

Flight Station
23.1 INTRODUCTION In addition to their primary mission, the pilot and copilot will operateflight essentialsystemsand the following communicationsystems:VHF/UHF andUHF 1. The pilot and copilot may also selectAN/ALQ-170 display information to be shown on indicators located at tbeir respective glareshields. As configured on this model aircraft, the flight station may transmit and receive on VHF/UHF, UHF 1, UHF 2, HFl and HF2 radios using tbe master ICS controls. The pilot may transmit and receive on UHF 1 securevoice system or SATCOM securevoice systemusingthesecurehandset, when selectedat the TAC/EWO station. For additional information on flight stationmission requirements, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 and NAVAIR Ol-75PAC1.1. 23.2 AN/ARC-l59 UHF 1 RADIO SYSTEM

Systems
23.2.1 Component Description 23.2.1.1 RT-1150/ARC-159(V) ReceiverTransmitter. The RT-1150 UHF 1 WT has a frequency range of 225.000 to 399.975 MHz, spaced25 kHz apart.Power outputis approximately10watts.Any 1 of 20 preset channelsor any 1 of 7,000 frequencies may be selectedfrom the C-9816 control unit. The R/T is located at bay 44. For ADF operation(UHF 1 only), the R/T supplies28 Vdc to the PP-7095,also locatedat bay 44. The PP-7095power supply supplies+225 Vdc to the ANIARA-25 ADF antenna. 23.2.1.2 MT-4656/ARC-159(V) Mount. The MT4658 mount is a nonconnectorized mount that holds the R/T, securedby bullet type pins at the rear andknurled knobs at the front of the mount. All RiT interface is wired directly to the connectors,located at the rear of the RJI unit. 23.2.1.3 AT-256AIARC Blade Antenna. UHF 1 usestwo blade antennas, one locatedon the upper fuselage at stationFS 299 andthe otherlocatedon the lower fuselageat station FS 1101. Both antennasare connected to an antennarelay (RE-219/ARR-40) that is controlledby the antenna control unit. The antennarelay switchesUHF 1 andUHF 5 betweentheupperandlower antennasand couples the AN/ARA-25 ADF antenna systemto UHF 1. 23.2.1.4 Antenna Control Unit. The antenna selector (LAC9216118-1)is locatedin the centerpedestal of the cockpit and switchesUHF 1 andUHF 5 between the upper and lower antennas.With UHF 1 ADF selected, UHF 5 is automatically switched to the upper antenna,regardless of switch position. 23.2.1.5 C-9616/ARC-159(V) Control Unit. The UHF 1 control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operatorto select READ, PRESET, MANUAL, and GUARD frequencyoperationand selectsassociated R/T’s for communication or navigation operation.Thecontrol unit is located in the centerpedestalof the cockpit. ORIGINAL

AN/ARC-159 UHF 1 with secure capability. The UHF 1 AN/ARC-l59 radio system comprises an RT1150 receiver/transmitter, an MT-4658 mount, a C9816 control unit, and a PP-7095 power supply. The radio system is a solid-state UHF R/T that provides two-way amplitude-modulated double-sideband,fullcarrier radio communication. The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on any of 7,000 frequencies, spaced25 kHz apart in the 225.000 to 399.975 MHz fkquency range. The radio is capable of guard frequency reception and ADF reception. The guard receiver module is a self-containedfix-tuned receiverset to 243.000MHz and can operatesimultaneously with the main receiver.During ADF reception,the radio receives RF signals from the DF antennaand routesthe demodulatedlow frequenciesto the DF amplifier. Any one of 20 preset frequenciesor any one of the 7,000 frequencieswithin the range of the radio may be selected. The red handsetmounted at the flight station provides the audio interface for UHF 1 secureoperations. The pilot controls flightcrew accessto the UHF 1 KY-58 securecommunications system.

23-l

NAVAIR gl-75PAA-1.3

23.2.1.6 UHF 1 KY-56 ZAHP Remote Control Unit. The KY-58 Z-AHP is a multifunction controller that permits the pilot to selectbetweenplain voice and cipher voice communication with the UHF 1 radio set. The remote control unit is located at the pilot’s side console. 23.2.1.7 UHF 1 KY-56 Security Unit. The KY-58 security unit permits the operator to select modes of operationfor the KY-58 systemand provides a till port for loading key data. Mounting provisions for the security unit arelocated at bay 43. 23.2.2 Power Requirements. UHF 1 system is supplied 28-Vdc power from the monitorable essential dc bus. To apply power to the UHF 1 system,pressthe following circuit breakers: 1. UHF 1 DC circuit breakers,locatedat the fonvard electronicsrack circuit breakerpanel. 2. UHF ANT RELAY DC circuit breaker,locatedat the forward electronicsrack circuit breakerpanel. 23.2.3 Operation. The UHF 1 system operatesin conjunction with the AN/AIC-22 ICS system, KY-58 securevoice system,and securehandset. The UHF radio setalsooperates “standalone”,in the eventofan ICS system failure. Operationof the AN/ARC-I59 UHF 1 radio set includes presetoperation, manual operation, CLEAR voice transmission,SECURE voice transmission, and emergencyGUARD operation. 23.2.3.1 Plain-Voice Operation. To transmit on UHF 1, the ICS mastercontrol MIC SEL switch must be setto UHF 1. The microphonekeyline is distributed through the FNIB to the UHF MIC control relay (K7). The UHF MIC control relay is actuated,applying a groundto the Rff via the secure/plain voice relay (Kl), keying the transmitter. Transmit voice MIC audio signals from the AIC-22 systemam distributedthroughthe F-1629/AGC acoustical filters, the ICS isolation box (A150), and secure/plainvoice relay (K2) to the R/T for modulation. Note During UHF plain-voice operationwith the Z-AHP secureRCU removed, ensureP2 of Z-AHP is connectedto jumper plug receptacle in pilot sideconsolefor 28 Vdc to remain applied to Kl and K2 relays for plain-voice operation.When securecomm cb out on cb panel, UHF-l radio inhibited. To monitor UHF 1 receiveaudio, select the UHF 1 RECEIVE switchon themasterICS controlunit. Receive ORIGINAL

audio originatesat the R/T as unattenuated audio and is distributedto theUHF 1 control unit in the flight station for volume control. The audio line is a 600ohm impedanceline. The receive audio signal is then distributed throughthe secure/plainvoice relay (K2) andinterfaces with the AIC-22 system. 23.2.3.2 Secure Voice Operation. To enablesecure voice operation, the TACiEWO must select the PILOT SECURE HANDSET switch for UHF 1 on the AUX ICS unit at the TAC/EWO console. 28 Vdc then energizesK2 of the SASU, connecting pilot handset MIC audio and earphonelines to the KY-58 security unit. When the pilot’s handsetis keyed, a ground is appliedto K6 of the SASU, which opensthe plain voice MIC control circuit by energizing secure/plainvoice relay (K2) at the pilot console. Securevoice audio is distributed from the red handset only, through the SASU, to theKY-58 securityunit. When theTAC/EWO handsetPTT switch is actuated,the TAC/EWO (SASU K6) securerelay is energized,allowing TAC/EWO priority on securecommunication, overriding the pilot’s transmission. 23.2.3.3 Antenna Selection. Selectionof the upper or lower blade antennais performedon the antenna select unit located in the flight station centerpedestal console. SelectingANT TOP switch energizesthe RE219/ARR-40 relay, connecting the upper AT-256 antenna to the UHF 1 RF line. UHF 5 is automatically switched to the antennanot being usedby UHF 1. 23.2.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. In the eventof an ICS failure, a microphoneandhandset canbe pluggedinto jacks on the t?ontof the RT-115O/ARC-159 for radio communication purposes. To remove power from the UHF 1 system during an emergency,pull the UHF 1 DC circuit breakerson the forward electronics rack circuit breakerpanel. 23.3 AN/ALQ-170 POSITION DISPLAY INDICATOR Both pilot and copilot stations have a PDI and PDI selectpanelthatallow theoperator to view AN/ALQ-170 antennaposition. In addition, the flight station hasthe capability to shut down all wing station pods via the search storespower switch located on the lower left centerpedestal. An AUX ICS control unit interfaces the C2W mission-specific equipment with the AIC-22 system and is installed at the following expandedpositions: in-flight communicator station, TAC/EWO, NAV, CZWl, and C2W2. In addition, by selecting NAV GROUP on the master ICS controls for pilot, copilot,

23-2

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

in-flight communicator, NAV, and TAUBWO permit voice annotationto the AN/ALQ-170 recorderthat is locatedin the systempod. To supportthe expanded radio suite, twelve additional antennas havebeeninstalled on the top andbottom of the aircraft. 23.3.1 Component Description 23.3.1.1 Position Display Indicator. The pilot PDI is located on top of the pilot’s glareshieldand the copilot PDI is installed on top of the copilot’s glareshield. Both PDI’s are mounted on hinges for easeof storagewhen not in use. 23.3.1.2 PDI Select Panel. PDI select panels are installed at the pilot andcopilot side consoles. A threeposition (centeroft) switch on the selectpanelsprovide selectionof information from the AN/ALQ-170 system podsatWS lZand15. 23.3.2 Power Requirements. The PDI selectpanel is supplied28 Vdc from the main load centerdc limiter bus.The PDI is supplied28 Vdc from theselectedwing storethroughtheassociated PDI selectpanelwhenwing storeinformation is selected. PDI selectpanel lighting

power is provided by the pilot or copilot overheadside console lighting control. To apply power to the PDI selectpanels,pressthe following circuit breakers: 1. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker, located at the armament circuit breakerpanel, forward leg electronicsrack. 2. WING STORES PWR RLY circuit breaker, located at the armament circuit breakerpanel, forward left electronicsrack. 3. PDI SELECT circuit breaker,locatedat the mission circuit breakerpanel at bay 45. 23.3.3 Operation. ThePDIselectpanelpertnitsthe operatorto routeAN/ALQ-170 information from either WS 12 or 15. Switch Sl on the selectpanel is a threepostion,center-off toggle switch that enableseither Kl andK2 (for WS 12)orK3 andK4 (for WS 15)androutes pod information to the associatedPDI. The centerposition deselects both WS relay banks. PDI information shown includes lock on, up, down, left, and right pod positions.

23-3 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

PART IX

Flightcrew

Coordination

Containedin P3A/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1). Chapter24 - Flightcrew Coordination(General) Chapter25 -Aircrew Responsibilities

45 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0675PAA-I.3

CHAPTER 24

Flightcrew
24.1 INTRODUCTION

Coordination

(General)

regardingthe mission objectives. Review all applicable message traffic. 2. Review operating areaand determinerestrictions andprocedures for entering,operating,andexiting. Coordinatewith all other airborneunits for safety of flight separation. 3. Obtain weather information from HWD or other suitableprediction source. 4. Determine specific POD loads.Confer with EWO concerningthe specific requirementsof the mission and plan the tactical portion of the mission. 5. Review all aspects of required tactical air-toground and air-to-air communications, including frequencies, typesof reports,andrequiredencryption devicesand publications. 24.2.3 Preflight 1. Review aircraft discrepancylog. 2. Coordinate with EWO and FE to ensureproper loading and inspection of mission essential equipment. 3. Preflight personalsurvival equipmentincludesthe following: a. LPA/SV2ihelmet b. Parachute c. Oxygen system 4. Ensureflight station preflight is completed in accordance with NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-12-l and otherdirectives. 5. Conductwalkaroundinspectionof interior andexterior of the aircraft. Visually ensureloadedpods match loadout sheet. ORIGINAL

The primary mission of the EPJJ aircraft is to conduct fleetreadiness operations by simulatingthreatradar profiles andconductingcommunicationsmani- pulation to simulate hostile actions againstcarrierbattle groups. Each crewmemberplays a vital role in support of this mission and the EP3J was designedto be operatedas an integratedteam effort. The TACYEWO shall be responsiblefor the tactical portion of the flight mission and shall coordinate the functions of the entire crew. The pilot, as aircraft commander,shall be responsiblefor the flightcrew being in their assigned positions for takeoff and landing (including ditching in an emergency).Each crewmembershall have individual responsibilities as described in the following paragraphsand in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1, Chapter8, Normal Procedures.Additional duties and responsibilitiesmay be assignedby the pilot and TAC/ EWO asnecessary. Each crewmember shall possessa thorough knowledgeof the equipmentat his station plus have a familiarity with equipmentused by other crewmen so that he can assumethe duties in an emergencyand facilitate normalcrew coordination. Eachcrewmemberis expected to be thoroughlyfamiliar with safetyandsurvival equipment in the aircraft andto be completely knowledgeable in the use and wearing of his personalequipment. 24.2 PLANE COMMANDER 24.2.1 Flight Planning 1. Review navigation planning and coordinatewith NAV the desiredroutesand any deviations. 2. Review fuel planning with flight engineer. 24.2.2 Mission Planning 1. Attend any mission briefings prior to flight. Obtain information from the operational commander 24-l

NAVAIR 0%75&U-1.3

6. Conduct a brief prior to engine starts, including route of flight, tactical training scenario, emergency procedures,and applicable crew coordination items. Ensureall pod pins arevisually sighted during the brief. 24.2.4 Start/Taxi. When required,setCondition V 24.2.5 Takeoff/Departure. 75PAC-1. 24.2.6 En Route 1. Monitor navigation equipment statusand aircraft position. Review incoming messagetraffic and updatetactics as necessary. 2. Prior to arriving on station establishcommunications with safetyof flight unit to coordinatedeconfliction with on stationunits. Determine if surface units arein flight operations.Establishinitial entry radial and altitude appropriatefor mission. 24.2.7 Missions 1. Establish aircrat?at properposition and altitude. 2. Coordinatetheefforts of the crew in orderto complete the mission. 3. Ensure proper transpondercodes are set and appropriatemodesare strangled,if required. 4. Maintain VFR evenunderradarcontrol.Vary mission altitude andprofile to ensureVFR. 5. Ensureradaris usedasthe primary aid for obstacle avoidanceandregularly receiveradarfixing information on all hazardsfrom the radaroperatorwhen the aircraft is below MOSA within 30 nm of land. Refer to NAVAIR Ol-

l

Procedures 3 and 4 may bemodified at the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgement, the safety of the aircraft canbe maintainedvisually in daylight VMC conditions.

24.2.6 Return. Ensure power to pods and all other EW systems are secured. Conduct a proper radio handoff with surfaceunit when switching to controlling agentfor safetyof flight and return clearance. 24.2.9 Postlanding/Taxi/Shutdown. Ensure that all mission equipment is properly secured.Turn in all mission paperworkto EWO and ensureaircraft is sanitized of classified material. 24.2.10 PostfIight. Ensure that equipment/program discrepanciesareproperly documented. 24.2.11 Debrief. Attend any mission debrief and ensurepostmission report is transmitted (if required). 24.3 TACTICAL ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER 24.3.1 Flight Planning Review navigation planning and determine required takeoff time basedon estimated en route time and on-stationarrival time. Determinerequirement for specialclothingandsurvival equipmentutilizing predictedtemperatures. Inspectrecordsof previoustactical equipmentdiscrepanciesto determineequipmentstatus. 24.3.2 Mission Planning 1. Attend any missionbriefings prior to flight. Obtain information from the operationalcommanderregarding the mission objectives.Review all applicablemessagetraffic.DeterminePODloadoutand crew personnelbasedon mission requirements. 2. Obtain weather information from HWD or other suitableprediction source. 3. Consult current tactical publications for special procedures. Determinespecific POD loadsandassociatedsoftware/SK4 card requirements.Confer with pilot concerningthe specific requirementsof the mission and plan the tactical portion of the mission.

Displayed information on thepilot andTACI EWO scopesaresubjectto relativepositional variance; therefore,the display shall not be relied upon asa substitutefor primary terrain avoidanceand standoffprocedures. Note MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle within 30 nm ofthe aircraft. 24-2

l

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

4. Review all aspects of required tactical air-toground and air-to-air communications, including frequencies, typesof reports,andrequiredencryption devicesand publications. 5. Brief crew on all aspectsof the tactical situation, POD loads, planned tactics, and tactical communications. 24.3.3 Preflight. The TAC/EWO shall be responsible for thepreflight andoperationalchecksofequipment listed in this chapter.He is also responsiblefor the effective performanceof the preflight checks performed by tactical crewmemberslisted elsewherein this chapter. Preflight and operationalchecksmay be delegated to other qualified crewmembers. 1. Conduct exterior aircraft inspection, inspecting aircraft antennasfor possibledamage.Review all equipment discrepanciesin the aircraft discrepancy log. 2. Conduct rack security check, TAC/EWO station hardwarechecks, and coordinatedKS check in accordance withNAVAIR OOl-75PAA-12 series, and Crew Station Maintenancemanuals.Monitor preflight status of all crewmembers to ensure timely takeoff. 3. Inspectall aircraft survival equipment.

6. Check for proper lighting indications with the wing status selector switches at both the TAC/EWO and flight station. 7. Ensurethat all pods, electronic warfare and navigation equipmentis preflighted and operationally ready for the assignedmission. 8. Ensure that required logs and forms are distributed. 9. Receivereportsof preflight checklist completion by all other crewmembers.Report “TAC CREW checklist complete” to pilot specifying equipment statusfor all stations.TAC CREW checklist is as follows: a. CommKrypto Aboard. As As

b. Tapes (VHS, cassette, ASN-124) Required. c. ALQ-170 SIM Cards/VHS tapes Required. d. Camera/film!binoculars As Required.

e. Laptopcomputer/battery pa&loader cable Aboard. f. TAtYEWObag Aboard. Complete.

4. Preflight personal survival equipment to include the following: a. LPA/SV2/helmet b. Parachute. 5. Ensure proper pods loading per the applicable checklist.Accompany theordnanceman during inspectionof the following: a. Conventionalweaponracks: (1) Safety pins (upper and lower) (2) Rack cocked(searroller up on slide) (3) Hooks latched (reddots) (4) Umbilical connectors (5) Sway braces.

g. Crew preflight h. LTN-72 -

NAV Mode. Checked. Complete.

i. Survival equipment -

j. IFT/ORD toolbox inventory k. NAV charts/logs Aboard.

1. NFO Aircrew NATOPS m. POD pins -

Aboard.

Checked(prior to enginestart). Complete.

n. Ladderup/door closed -

10. Conducta briefat planesideofthe updatedtactical situation, emergency procedures,and applicable crew coordinationitems. 24.3.4 Taxi. When directedby the pilot to setCondition V. inspectthe aircraft for properequipmentstowage and crew readinessfor takeoff. For night takeoff, the cabin shouldbe darkenedto provide adequate night vi24-3 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 91.XiPAA-I.3

sion for crewmembers in the event of an emergency. Report Condition V set to pilot. 24.3.5 Takeoff/Departure 1. Monitor UHF/VHF radios. 2. Upon setting Condition III, conduct an in-flight equipmentcheck.In highdensitytrafftc areas, tactical crewmembers should use CONF 1 for ICS communications. 3. Determinethecapabilityoftheaircmfi tocomplete the assigned mission andreport status ofali tactical stationsto the pilot. 4. Coordinatethedrafting of requiredreportswith the in-flight communicator. 24.3.6 En Route 1. Monitor navigation equipment statusand aircratl position. Review incoming messagetrafftc and updatetactics as necessary. 2. Prior to arriving on station, apply power to PODS to ensureadequatewarmup time. 24.3.7 Missions 1. Direct thepilot in the positioning ofthe aircraftby the use of fly-to-points. Update the pilot display with tactical information. 2. Coordinatetheefforts of the crew in orderto complete mission requirements. 3. During all operational and crew ttaining flights, when the aircraft is operating on station, display ail significant features(land, standoff, on-station areas,etc.) within 30 nm of the aircraft. Ensure pilot display, ASA-66, is updatedaccordingly. 4. Ensure. radaris usedasthe primary aid for obstacle avoidanceandregularly receiveradarfixing information on all hazardsfrom theradaroperatorwhen the aircraft is below MOSA within 30 nm of land. p&-ii&-( Displayed information on thepilot andTACI EWO scopesaresubjectto relativepositional variance; therefore,the display shall not be

relied on as a substitute for primary terrain avoidanceand standoff procedures. Note MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle within 30 nm of the aircraft. Procedures 3 and4 may be modified at the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgement, the safety of the aircraft canbe maintainedvisually in daylight VMC conditions. 5. Control frequencyselectionof UHF systemsNos. 2 through6. 6. The tactical electronic warfareofficer shall supervise crewmembers and passengersin the cabin during emergencies. 24.3.6 Return. Monitor navigation equipmentstatus andaircraft position. Ensurepower to pods andall other EW systemsaresecured. 24.3.9 Descent/Approach. When directed by the pilot to set Condition V, inspectthe aircraft for proper equipmentstowageand crew readinessfor landing. For night landing, the cabin should be darkened.Report Condition V set to pilot. 24.3.10 PostiandingITaxilShutdown. Ensure that all mission equipment is properly secured.Collect mission paperwork and ensureaircraft is sanitized of classified material. 24.3.11 Posfflight. Ensure that equipment/program discrepanciesareproperly documented. 24.3.12 Debrief. Attend any mission debrief andensurepostmissionreport is transmitted(if required). 24.4 NAVIGATOR ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER 24.4.1 Flight Planning 1. Assist patrol plane commander in determining route to on-station. 2. Obtain current minimum altimeter settings and ditch headings from a HWD or other suitable weather forecast. The flight plan, Howgozit, and preflight log should be preparedby the pilots and the NAVIEWO utilizing predicted winds and temperatures.

ORIGINAL

24-4

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

3. Coordinatewith the flight station on the statusof warning areas,restrictedareas,andNOTAM 4. Obtain appropriate charts of sufficiently small scale (usually 1:500,000or 1:I,OOO,OOO) to provide maximum terrain depiction and fixing accuracy. The NAV/EWO shall ensurethat all terrain, obstacles,restricted and warning areas,and any sensitivestandoff areas areplotted on a suitableen route navigation chart. For on station, plot on the appropriatechart all obstacles,warning areas,any sensitivestandoffarea,otherhazards to navigation and minimum operational safe altitude. Plot and coordinatewith the radar operatorand flight station suitable radio aids to navigation. Note MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highestobstaclewithin 30 nm of theaircraft. 5. Ensurethat the Howgozit chart is preparedin accordancewith currentinstructionspromulgatedby the operationalcommanderor for any flight scheduled to operate in excessof 1,000nm from the nearest suitable field. Coordinate fuel requirementswith the patrol planecommander. 6. Ensurecurrentflight information publications are obtainedfor navigation. 7. Review all equipmentdiscrepancies in the aircraft discrepancyhook. 24.4.2 Mission Planning. Pertinentinformation regardingknown or possibletargetpositions,routes,flight planning, recognition, friendly units to be encountered en route, restricted areas,havens,and communication information shouldbe clearly understood. 24.4.3 Preflight 1. Review aircraft discrepancybook. 2. Inventory all navigation equipment. The equipment is mandatoryfor all overwaterflights for the following: a. Appropriate charts b. Forms (1) Navigation logs (2) Howgozit (3) Messageforms (including emergency). 24-5

c. Publications (1) Navigation en route supplements and flight information handbook (2) NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.1 (NFO/Aircrew NATOPS Manual) (3) NAVAIR Ol-75-PAA- 1 (SUM). d. Computers, divider set, appropriateplotters, pencils, erasers,tape,and greasepencils. 3. Review safetyrequirementsfor flight. 4. Initialization and preflight checks shall be conductedin accordancewith NAVAIR Ol-75PAA12 seriesand/orNAVAIR 01-PAA- 11. 5. Preflight personalsurvival equipmentincludesthe following: a. LPAlSV2fhelmet b. Parachute. 6. Obtain a cross-check from the TAC/EWO or PPC verifying that the precise aircraft position is entered in the inertial prior to acceptanceof NAV mode for all overwater flights. The flight station shall verify the latitudeilongitude of the selected waypoint during en route navigation. 7. On any flight utilizing the LTN-72 positional and/orwaypoint coordinatesfor navigation,a twoman rule is mandatory.A qualified crewmember may entercoordinates,but they must be verified by the PPC or TAC/EWO. 8. Report to tactical electronicwarfare officer when checklist is completed. Report equipment that is inoperativeor operatingat reducedefftciency. 9. Conduct a detailed planesidebrief of highest terrain at origin anddestinationrouteof flighthazards to navigation, warning andrestrictedareas,sensitive standoff areas,on-station MOSA, and ditch headings. 24.4.4 Start/Taxi 1. Ensureinertial accepted. 2. Turn on Doppler.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-1.3

3. Monitor or obtain from copilot clearanceinstructions. 4. Set barometric altimeter setting. 5. Obtain me1reading (if required). 6. Monitor UHF/VHF radios. 7. Preparefor GEO-correcton the runway numbers. 8. Set Condition V. 244.5 Takeoff/Departure 1. Perform GEO-correct on the runway numbers. 2. Monitor UHF/VHF radios.

(2) AF’N-153 (3) LTN-72. f. Drift information (1) APN-153 (2) LTN-72. g. Wind information (1) ASN-124 (NAVpage) (2) LTN-72 (3) APN-153 (manual). 24.4.6 En Route

3. Upon initial Condition III being set, an in-flight equipment check shall be made. After the check hasbeenperformed,an equipmentstatusreport of the following equipment shall be given to the tactical electronic warfam officer. The tactical electronic warfare officer andpilots shall be informed as to which system is preferred for en route and tactical navigation. a. All indicators (IAS, OAT, altimeter). b. Heading information

1. Monitor navigation equipment, aircraft position and obtain and plot an hourly fix of the aircraft position. Perform geographiccorrectsasrequired to update NAV systems and DR track. Notify flight station whenever intended flightpath will passwithin 1,000feet in altitude andwithin 30 nm of a hazardto navigation or a restrictedarea. 2. Resetbarometric altimeter setting to 29.92 when required. 3. Maintain an accuratenavigation log.

(1) -0
(2)

msw-0

(3) ASN-124 (TH) (4) Wet compass(MH)

a. Specific log entries shall be made to indicate navigation system performance for initial inflight equipment checksand for hourly system verification checks. b. Full-line log entries shall be made when accomplishing the following: (1) Departing a fix (2) Determining a new wind

(5)
C.

Magnetic variation.

Radio navigation aids (1) ADF (2) TACAN (4) Starting a new log page (3) Omega. (5) ChangingNAV/EWOs. (3) Making a plannedcoursechange

d. TAS (MB-9, variance should not exceed 5 knots). e. GS

c. CH through GS entries shall be made when accomplishing the following: (1) Altering headingfor a changein drift

(1) ASN-124 (NAV page) ORIGINAL 24-6

NAVAIR 01.XPAA-1.3

(2) Conducting hourly navigation system verification. Note A checkmark indicates no change in that column since the last entry in that column. A blank box indicates that an entry is not applicable. 4. Update the Howgozit once per hour (if required). Magnetic variation shall be updated in the ASN-124 when MAG VAR is not being updatedautomatically. 24.4.7 Mission 1. When below MOSA, within 30 run of a hazardto navigation, monitor the aircraft DR position continuously and fix the aircraft position every onehalf hour. When below MOSA within 30 mn of a hazardto navigation,the radarshall bethe primary aid for obstaclea\;oidance. As directedby thepilot, theNAV/EWO electronicwarfareofficer shahbrief the flight stationon the aircraft position in relation to theclosestterrainanda suitablesafeescape heading. When descendingon station,the NAV/EWO shall brief the flight station and crew on MOSA, safeescape headings, andhigh obstructions. Note The aboveprocedures may be modified at the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgement, the safety of the aircraft canbe maintainedvisually in daylight VMC conditions. In the event of navigation system uncertainty or navigationsystemfailure in marginal VMC, or IMC conditions, the aircrafi shall immediately climb to briefed MOSA on a suitable safe heading. The lossof radarshould not constitutenavigation system failure if accurate fixing is available. 2. Computeand log wind at leastonceeachhour and for each significant change. 3. When a Howgozit is required, it shall be updated and shown to the pilot hourly. 4. Be preparedto assistthe tactical EWO as directed in drafting all requiredreports.Be preparedat all times to give the in-flight communicatorandcopilot the aircraRpositionfor emergency transmission. 24-7

5. The NAViEWO shall notify the flight station whenever intended tlightpath will pass within 1,000feet and 30 nm of a hazardto navigation or within 30 nm of a restrictedarea. 24.4.9 Return 1. At off station, fix the aircrafi position and update the systemgeographicposition if necessary. 2. At off station,completea navigation systemaccuracy check. 3. Resetbarometric altimeter setting to 29.92 when required. 4. Monitor navigation equipment and aircratt position. Perform all other en route proceduresas required. 24.4.9 Descent/Approach 1. Monitor UHF/VHF radios. 2. Check in with flight station,obtain barometricaltimeter setting, and coordinateMOSA. 3. Monitor approachensuring all clearancesavoid terrain, known obstacles, and warning and restricted areas. 4. When directed,set Condition V. 24.4.10 PostlandingRaxilShutdown 1. Close out the navigationlog andtill out the inertial data sheetor logbook as required. 2. Ensure that all navigation systems are secured prior to leaving the aircraft. 3. Ensure that all navigation equipment discrepancies areproperly recorded. 24.5 C2W OFFICERS (C2Wl and C2W2) 24.5.1 Mission Planning 1. Attend the mission brief asdirectedandreview air and surfaceorder-of-battlecharacteristics,obtain communications frequencies, and coordinate planned intrusion and-jamming tactics with the TACiEWO.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-‘ISPAA-1.3

2. Ensure that sufftcient communications logs, cassettetapes,cassette recorder,card-of-the-day, and codeworddocumentsare on boardthe aircraft. 3. Ensurethat all available aids for COMM analysis and required referencematerial are on board the aircraft. 24.5.2 Preflight 1. Perform visual inspection of bays, racks, and equipment for security, and installation of all required components. 2. Preflight personalsurvival equipmentincludesthe following: a. LPA/SVZ/helmet b. Parachute. 3. Review safetyrequirementsof flight. Annotaterecordings and required logs with the minimum information at thebeginning and endof the logs for following: a. Classification b. Date

d. MD-1203 e. MainICS f. AUXICS g. Time codegenerator. 5. Set and synchronizethe time code generatorwith the NAVIBWO. 6. Participate in coordinated ICS checks with the
CIXW.

7. Advise the TAC/EWO of equipment status and completion of preflight checklists. 24.5.3 Start/Taxi 1. Prior to engine turn-up, ensurepower is secured to unnecessary equipment. 2. When directedby the pilot, setCondition V. 24.5.4 Takeoff/Departure 1. Upon initial Condition III being set,promptly perform the following: a. USQ-113 Power ON. Power ON.

c. EventNo b. MD-1203 d. Aircrat? BuNo c. Mission UHP radios e. Squadron (1) Nos. 3,4,5, and 6 f. Crew d. AUXICS g. Aircraft commander h. TAClEiWO I. C2W of&et(s) 1 and 2 j. NAV/EWO k. Time (for tapesand logs if required). 4. Perform operational checks of the C2W equip ment for the following: a. Station lighting I. Prior to arriving ONSTA, perform the following: b. USQ-113; Nos. 1 and 2 c. UHF radios; Nos. 3,4,5,6 ORIGINAL 24-5 a. USQ-113 (1) Configure as required for use with USQ113 or mission UHPs. e. VHSVCR (1) Power ON. Power ON.

(2) Coordinate with radar operatorto ensure VHSNCR tapeis installedandQUED for proper recordingwith time code. 24.5.5 En Route

NAVAIR WI-75PbU-1.3

(1) Target tables - Load
(2)

C.

Number and type of interceptors(modex, tail lettersif visible)

Target tables memory

Store in nonvolatile d. Time interceptorsdetach e. Position at detach. f. Hostile intent (shouldering, wing rock, or flashing light signals). 3. Notify and coordinatewith theTACYEWO prior to commencing intrusion or jamming of HF/VHFI UHF communications. 4. Task the in-flight communicator to monitor, record, and interfere with appropriateHF frequencies. Closely control and monitor the in-flight communicators performanceto ensureobjectives for mission are achieved. 5. Maintain appropriatelogs of intrusion and jamming to include the following: a. Frequencies.

(3) Ensure safety-of-flight frequency (cease BUZZER frequency) is loaded into ALERT frequency or monitored on one of the UHF mission radios. b. MD-1203 (1) Signal generator tonesas desired. c. Mission UHF radios (1) Nos. 3,4,5, and 6 needed. Set frequenciesas Set frequenciesand

Do not set UHF mission radios to Bequenties that may be jammed by the USQ-113 or othermission UHF radios, as damageto receiversmight occur. d. AUXICS Note With AUX ICS selected,C2W stations are isolated from the main ICS systemand will not hear normal ICS calls. e. VHS VCR (1) Coordinate with radar operator for ON/ OFF times for VHSNCR recorder. 24.5.6 Mission 1. Monitor radios and scannerfor communications activity. Advise TAC/EWO on possibletighter interceptsandair defensepostureasinformation becomesavailable. 2. Coordinatewith the flight station to ensureany interceptsby fighters are recorded: a. Time of intercept b. Position

b. Time: ON - OFF. c. Utilization of frequency, if known (e.g., LINK, AAWC&R, FAD, CMDNET). d. Responses to jamming and intrusion (i.e., intercept,kick, chattetmark,etc.). e. Ceasebuzzer calls. Log call sign of umt mmatingcease buzzer,andfrequency(ies)affected if known. Obtain andlog aircraft position from NAViEWO. f. ONSTA, COMEX, FINEX, OFFSTA. 6. Coordinateclosely with TACiEWO to maximize effectivenessduring CTTG/ASMD and OPFOR raids. 24.5.7 Return 1. Secureall station equipment. 2. Perform postflight visual inspection of bays, racks, and all mission equipment. 3. Obtain all cassette tapes and place in secure storage. 4. Collect all classified information and documentation andplace in securestorage. 24-9 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-1.3

24.5.8 Descent/Approach. pilot, set Condition V.

When directed by the Collect C2W

c. VHF/UHF (ARC-1 82) d. VOR-I and VOR-2

24.5.9 Postlandinflaxilshutdown. and in-flight communicator I-IF logs.

e. Tacan f. ADF g. Radaraltimeter

24.5.10 Postflight. Ensure all equipmentdiscrepancies are properly documented. 24.5.11 Debrief. Attend mission debriefingwith logs andtapesasdirected. 24.6 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR 24.8.1 Flight Planning 1. Ensureadequate teletypepaper,crypt0 keying material, communication publications, and message blanks are taken along to complete the mission. 2. Review all equipmentdiscrepancies in the aircraft discrepancybook. 24.6.2 Mission Planning. Attendmissionbrief,uless otherwise directed, to acquire mission call sign, frequencyplan, existing communication difficulties, or special instructions as deemed necessaryby higher authority. 24.6.3 Preflight 1. The preflight andoperationalchecksfor individual systemsshall not be initiated until a generalvisual inspection of each system is conducted.This inspectionshall include rack security of the system components,and security of all connectionsand circuit breakers. 2. Conduct preflight checks for the following equipment: a. KS (1) Pilot (2) Copilot (3) Flight engineer (4) Radio (5) Starboardforward observer (6) PA system b. UHF-l and UHF-2 ORIGINAL 24.10

b. UHF/HF securecommunications. Flight recorder-locator i. IFF mode 4 j. I-IF-I, HF-2 and HF-3 (receiver) k. SATCOMM radio/KY-58. 3. Set IFF mode 2 and 4 codes. 4. Wind and set all aircraft clocks. 5. Preflight aircmR and personalsurvival equipment include the following: a. LPAlSV2lbelmet b. Parachute. 6. Review safety requirementsfor flight. 7. Keep tactical coordinator and in-flight technician informed during preflight of any equipmentthatis inoperativeor operatingat reducedeff%ziency. Report to tactical coordinatorwhen preflight checklist is completed. 24.6.4 Taxi. When directed,set ConditionV. 24.6.5 Takeoff/Departure 1. Monitor I-IF/UHF/VHF radios 2. Act as a visual observer. 24.6.6 En Route/Mission 1. Condition III a. Promptly establish communicationswith controlling station verifying that HF-1 and HF-2 are operating properly. Report to pilot that communications are established.

NAVAIR W75PAA-1.3

b. Reportequipmentstatusto tacticalcoordinator. 2. Monitor frequencies asdirectedby thepilot andby operationaldoctrine. 3. Request position from NAV/EWO 10 minutes prior to time position report is due. 4. Authenticate/challenge messages as directed. 5. Transmit messageswhen directed by mission commanderor pilot in command when no mission commanderis assigned. 6. Be preparedto transmit emergencymessagesat anytime. 7. Maintain logs as directed by communication doctorine/controllingactivity. Note Equipment operating procedures may be found by referring to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA11(SUM). In-flight maintenance procedures may be found by referring to NAVAIR Ol15PAA-12 series. 24.6.7 DescentlApproach 1. When directed as visual observer,monitor HF/ UHF/VHF radios. 2. When directed,set Condition V. 24.6.8 Postlandingfraxi 1. Zeroize the KY-58, KYV-5, andIFF modes2 and 4 codes.

24.6.10 Debrief. Attend mission debriefing with appropriatelogs and recordsas directed. 24.7 RADAR OPERATOR 24.7.1 Flight Planning 1. Review all equipmentdiscrepancies in the aircraft discrepancybook. 2. Obtain radar navigation charts of sufficient scale to provide maximum terrain depiction and fixing accuracy. These charts shall cover areas of iutendedaircraft operationswhere significant navigation featuresaffect thesafetyof flight. The radar operatorshall coordinatewith the NAV/EWO to plot suitableradarfix sites. Note Charts shall be of either 1:500,000 or I: l,OOO,OOO scale. 24.7.2 Mission Planning 1. Obtain information regardingthe mission objectives, targetthreat, andtarget characteristics. 2. Review safety requirementsfor flight (EMCON restrictions,route of flight). 24.7.3 Preflight

Ensure that bus checks and other necessity electricalinterruptionsareperformedprior to initial turn-onprocedures. 1. Conduct electronic warfare operatorstationhardware checks and coordinated ICS check per NAVAIR 01-75PAA-12-5.

Select 29 MHz prior to securing ARC-190 systemto preventinadvertentdamageby RF radiation from nearby transmitters.Do not load antenna. 2. Secureall equipment at the in-flight communicator station. 24.6.9 Postfllght 1. Inventory the communication box. 2. Properly record all radio discrepencies. 24-l I

2. Preflight personalsafety/survivalequipmentto include the following: a. LPA/SVZ/helmet b. Parachute. 24.7.4 StatVlaxi 1. APS-80 STAB/OUT switch to OUT.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

c. AAS-

IRDS

(1) Coordinateextensionof IRDS turret with
STAB-OUT switch shall beplacedin the out position for takeoff and landing to prevent possible damage to the antenna and tilt stabalizationsystem. 3. IRDS turret retracted(if applicable). 1 WARNING 1 the pilot.
(2)

SelectMAN TRK, then BIT ON.

(3) Adjust video level, gain, contrast, and brightness;ensurethat 10 shadesof gray arevisible. (4) Ensure target tracking sight control will correctly operateturret in all modes. 2. Electronic warfareoperatorshall reportequipment statusto TACiEWO on completion of Condition III check. 24.7.6 En Route 1. The tactical crew aswell asthe flight stationcrew must be awareof all factorsthat may affect safety if accidentsareto be avoided.Wheneveroperation of the radar is permitted, it should be usedto enhancesafety of flight. The electronic warfare operatorcan provide the following: a. Radarvectorsto avoid hazardous weatherconditions. Use of the lowest practical rangescale and the FTC function can improve weather definition.

To ensureturret areais clearof equipmentor personnel,post an outside observerprior to extendingor retractingturret. ,4. ReportIRDS statusto pilot as required. 5. Secureall loose gearat/aroundstation. 6. Set Condition V when directed. 24.7.5 Takeoff/Departure 1. Upon Condition III being setby the tactical coordinator, the electronic warfare operatorwill conduct in-flight equipmentchecksfor the following: a. MW-2 for correct true heading. b. Radarsystem(as EMCON conditionspermit) Note Prior to applying high voltageto APS-80 system, coordinatewith the flight station to ensurecolor weatherradar is not in use.

Heavy htrbulenceand hail may extendoutward as far as 20 miles from a fully developed thunderstormcell or cells. b. Clearancefrom terrain and other obstructions during low-level operations.Familiarity with navigation chartswill provide information as to the location of known terrain obstructions.
C.

(1) Both APS-80 systemsfor proper display
on the APAindicator. or OK-620/APQ control

(2)

Antenna sweep in full scan, 210° sector, and 45Osector.

(3) Antennatilt in STAB-OUT andSTAB-IN contigumtions. (4) APA- 125or OK-62O/APQcontrol indicator for correct true heading.

Use of navigation charts and a knowledge of expectedaircraft track utilized in conjunction with the radarpresentationcanbe useful in the event of navigation equipment failure or as a backup for other navigation equipment.

and ID-499 or OK-620lAPQ (5) APAcontrol indicator group for ground track.

2. Electronic warfare operator shall conduct only offset radar run-ins taking into account weather and visibility.

ORIGINAL

24-12

NAVAIR 0%75?AA-1.3

3. When the aircraft is operating within 30 run of land and below minimal operational altitude, the radar shall become the primary aid for obstacle avoidanceand shall be used continuously. As directedby the pilot, the radar operator shall brief the flight station on the aircraft position in relation to the closestterrain and/orother hazardsto navigationandbeprepared to provide asuitableescape heading. Note a MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle within 30 nm of the aircraft. a The aboveproceduresmay be moditiedat the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgment, the safety of the aircraftcanbe maintainedvisually in daylight VMC conditions.
l

6. Provide the NAV/EWO with radar fix infonnation, and other navigation information. 7 . UseASN- 124markerentry controller,asdirected. 24.7.8 DescenffApproach 1. When challenged, respond to flight descent checklistswith appropriateresponse. 2. Maintain safety of flight as per in-flight safety proceduresoutlined in en route section. 3. Prior to landing, ensurethe following takesplace: a. Station is properly rigged for landing (no gear adrift). b. AF’S-80STAB to OUT. c. IRDS turret is retracted. 4. When directed,set Condition V. 5. Monitor approachand landing on UHPiVHP. 24.7.9 Postflight 1. Prior to leaving the aircraft, ensurethe following stepsareaccomplished: a. EWO electronic equipmentsecured. b. All equipmentdiscrepancieslogged. c. Coordinate postflight with other crewmen in accordance with currentNAVAIR directives. 24.7.10 Debrief. Attend mission debriefing with appropriatelogs andrecordsasdirected.

During certainEMCON conditions or operational missions, the use of radar may jeopardize the crew and aircrafi. In these situations,the use of mdar shall be at the discretionof the mission commander.

24.7.7 Mission 1. When challenged, respond to flight descent checklist with appropriateresponse. 2. Operateradar,MAD, ESM, IRDS, and IFF systems and subsystems as directed by the TAU EWO to supportthe mission. 3. Maintain safety of flight as per in-flight safety procedures outlined in en route section. 4. Reporttargetsto the tactical coordinator. 5. Provide steering information to the pilot as directedby the tactical coordinator,

24-13 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

WI-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

25

Aircrew

Responsibilities

Containedin NAVAIR Ol-75PAG1

25-l

(Reverse

Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

PART X

Natops Evaluation
Conk&d in PJA/Et/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1). Chapter26 - NATOPS Evaluation

47 (ReverseBlank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

26

NATOPS Evaluation
26.12 FLIGHT STATION CHECKRIDE Refer to P-3A/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual NAVAJR Ol-75PAC-1. 26.13 TACTICAL COORDINATOR/ ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA AREA A: GROUND PROCEDURES/BRIEF 1. On-stationsituation/crewcoordination Qualified - Thorough brief performed conceming on-stationsituationto include targetthreatand crew coordination consideration (i.e., CCIKCJ and EW systems employment, aircraft altitude, navigation systemutilization, equipmentemployment, weaponutilization and settings,and battle/ flight conditions). Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom Unqualified-Unfamiliarwith equipment. theuse of required Qualified-Inspected recordsof previoustactical equipment discrepancies,determined equipment status,andbriefed crew. Conditionally Qualifkd - lncomctly determined aircraftstatus hornprevious equipment discrepancies. Unqualitied - Failed to review previous equip ment discrepancies. *AREA B: PREFLIGHT * 1. Safety and survival equipment Qualified-Personal survival gearproperlyfitted andworn. Demonstrated thoroughknowledgeand utilization ofrequiredpersonalandgeneralaircraft safety and survival equipment. Conditionally Qualified- Minor omissionsnoted or minor lack of knowledgeof personalor aircraft safety andsurvival equipment.

Unqualified - Failed to brief crew adequately. ‘2. Equipment/circuit breakerlocation l 2. Safety of flight/communication procedures Qualified - Thorough briefing performed concerning safety of flight to include MOSA pmceduresandair-to-air/air-to-ground communications. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of aircraft electronic equipment/circuit breaker location. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Failed to brief crew adequately. 3. Aircraft status

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with aircraft electronic equipment/circuitbreakerlocation. 3. System knowledge Qualified - Demonstrateda basic knowledge of aircraft systems to include normal and degraded operatingmodes. 26-1 ORIGINAL

*Critical Areas/Subareas

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

c. Ev*L”*T,ON

N”MERlcAL

GRADE

f* EvAL.UATlON

ADJECTNE

mADE

Asterisk

(‘1 denotes

critical

arealsubarea N 10197

Figure 26-I. TAUEWO NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet1 of 2)

ORIGINAL

26-2

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

I
N10197

Figure.26-l. TACYEWO NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet(Sheet2 of 2)

26-3

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3 Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. Unqualified systems. deviationsfrom ‘2. Condition of flight Qualified - Coordinated the proper setting of conditions of flight with flight station. Conditionally Qualified-Did not properly COOLdinate setting conditions of flight. Unqualified - Failed to ensure proper navigational procedures used or to coordinate MOSA procedures. Lack of knowledge of celestial procedures. ‘3. Positional awareness Qualified - Ensuredproper navigational proceduresused.CoordinatedMOSA procedures. Conditionally Qualified from above. Minor discrepancies

Lack of familiarity with aircraft

‘4. Equipment readiness Qualified- Ensuredall readiness checksoutlined in the TACCO Crew Station Manual completed, including properpod loading proceduresandpreflight operation. Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions from above. Unqualified-Failed nesschecks. to perform equipmentreadi-

5. Readinessfor taxi/takeoff Qualified- Ensuredtactical crew checklist completed, Condition V properly set and reportedto PPC. Helmet donned(asdirected),visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect,seatfully lowered, headrestproperly extended,and lapbelt and shoulderharnesssecurelyfastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. omissionsfrom

Unqualified-Failed to ensure pmpernavigational procedures used to coordinateMOSA procedures. Lack of knowledge of celestialpmcedums. *AREA D: TACTICAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION 1. Displays Qualified - Effectively usedaircraft tactical displays to managesystemsand information. Conditionally Qualified-Minor the above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Failed to properly preparefor taxi/ takeoff. *AREA C: CREW COORDINATION * 1. Tactical crew coordination Qualified-Positively directedthe positioning of the aircraft during the tactical evolution. Kept the pilots well informed of the progressof the tactical situation. Coordinated all information received from other EW crewmembers and properly directedthe activities of the entire crew. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Failed to effectively use tactical displays to managesystemsand information. *2. Software Qualified - Effectively employed TACCO so& ware functions. Conditionally Qualified-Minor the above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified- Mission not accomplishedbecause of poor useof the TACCO softwarefunctions. ‘3. EW equipmentutilization

Unqualified-Major discrepanciesin aboveresulted in the unsatisfactory prosecution of the mission.

*Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL 26-4

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Qualified- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of EW systemsand effective utilization. Conditionally Qualified-Minor the above. deviationsfrom

Conditionally Qualified -Minor above.

deviations from

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with routine velocity, TAS, and headingchecks. 4. Armament control panel Qualified - Demonstratedthorough knowledge of armament control panel, emergency pod release,andjettison procedures. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of EW systemsand utilization. ‘4. Tactical communication Qualified - Effectively coordinated required messagetraffic/contact reports; demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of radiosand KS system. Conditionally Qualified-Minor the above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of pod releaseprocedures. ‘AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES * 1. Fire of unknown origin Qualified - Properly directedcrew efforts in locating and fighting the tire. Demonstrateda thorough knowledge of individual crewmember duties.Continuouslyreportedprogress totheflight station. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledgeof emergencyprocedures.Did not effectively assistpilot in directing crew in the emergencysituation. Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of emergencyprocedure. *2. Ditching Qualified - Timely preparation executed by crewmembersandpassengers. Station fully rigged for ditching, Condition V set in cabin, jettison monitored. Conditionally Qualified from above. Minor discrepancies

Unqualified - Failed to coordinate message traffic. Inadequateknowledge of radios or ICS system. AREA E: NAVIGATION/ARMAMENT PANEL 1. Navigation systems Qualitied- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of navigation fixing systemsto include ASN-124, LTN-72, ARN-99, GPS. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom CONTROL

Unqualified- Lack of familiarity with equipment that could have significantly affected successof mission. 2. Celestial computation/plotting Qualified - Demonstrateda proficiency in observing,computing, and plotting celestial bodies. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with celestial observation,computation,or plotting. 3. Navigation system monitoring ‘3. Qualified - Demonstratedthorough knowledge ofroutine velocity, TAS, andheadingchecks. CoordinatedMOSA procedures. *Critical Areas/Subareas 26-5

Unqualified - Stationsnot fully rigged for ditching; loose gearadrift in cabin. Significant lack of knowledgeof crewmemberresponsibilities. Bailout Qualified - Timely preparation executed by crewmembers and passengers. Properly donned parachuteand otherpersonalequipment.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

01-75PAA-1.3

Conditionally Qualified-Minor above.

deviationsfrom

26.1 4 NAVIGATOR/ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

Unqualified- Improperly donnedparachute, untimely preparation,lack of knowledge of bailout procedures. 4. Other emergencyprocedures Qualified - Properly reactedto simulated emergencies such as smoke/fume removal, APU fire, brake fire, explosive/rapid decompression. Displayed thorough knowledge of emergency procedures. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergencyprocedures.Did not effectively assist pilot in directing crew in emergency situation. Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of emergencyprocedures. AREA G: LANDRKYPOSTFLIGHT

AREA A: GROUND PROCEDURES/BRIEF * 1. Appropriate chartsand navigation publications Qualified-Properly preparedfor assignedflight with complete set of appropriatechartsandpublicationson board.Logs andchartspreflighted with route of flight, known obstacles,and terrain. Restricted, warning, and sensitive standoff areas clearly marked. Conditionally Qualified-Missing an appropriate chart or publication or missing some information not considered to jeopardize safety of flight or precludesuccessfulcompletion of mission. Unqualified-Missing appropriatechartsor publications or missing some information that would precludesuccessfulcompletion of mission. *2. Weather,wind, and hazardsto navigation

1. Preparationfor landing Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harnesssecurely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. Unqualified-Did deviationsfrom Qualified - Demonstratedthorough knowledge of all factors affecting flight safety along the intended route of flight. Properly preparedfor assignedflight with complete preflight logs. Conditionally Qualified - Missing some information along the route of flight not consideredto jeopardizethe safety of flight or precludecompletion of mission. Unqualified -Missing important information that would affect the safe completion of the mission. 3. Aircraft status/maintenance records Qualified - Review airma navigation system maintenancerecords. Conditionally Qualified - Incorrectly determined a&rat? status from previous equipment discrepancies. Unqualified - Failed to review previous equipment discrepancies.

not set Condition V.

2. Postflight procedures Qualified - Ensured all EW and navigation equipment secured.Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and records as directed. Maintenancediscrepanciesreported. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified- Failed to attendmission debriefing with appropriatelogs and recordsas indicatedor failed to debrief maintenancediscrepancies.

*Critical Areas/Subareas
ORIGINAL

26-6

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA.1.3

*4. Planesidebrief Qualified-Briefcdcrewonallaspectsofenroute and on-station weather, winds, warning area status,and route of flight with known obstacles, significant terrain, andMOSA. Conditionally Qualified from above. Unqualified-Failed *AREA B: PREFLIGHT * 1. Safetyand survival equipment Qualified- Personalsurvival gearproperly fitted andworn. Demonstrated thoroughknowledgeand utilization ofrequiredpersonalandgeneralaircraft safetyand survival equipment. Conditionally Qualified-Minoromissionsnoted or minor lack of knowledgeofpersonal or aircraft safetyand survival equipment. Unqualified-Unfamiliarwith equipment. theuseofrequired Minor deviations

Qualified-Ensured all readiness checksoutlined in the TACCO Crew StationManual completed. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. omissions from

Unqualified- Failedto perform equipmentreadinesschecks. 5. Readinessfor taxi/takeoff

to brief crew. Qualified - Ensuredtactical crew checklist completed, Condition V properly set and reportedto PPC.Helmet donned(asdirected),visor down and locked,gloves on, seatback fully erect, seatfully lowered, headrestproperly extended,and lapbelt and shoulderharnesssecurely fastened.No loose gear at station. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. Unqualified-Failed takeoff. omissionsfrom

to properly preparefor taxi/

AREA C: CREW COORDINATION 1. Knowledge of crewmemberduties

*2. Equipment/circuit breakerlocation Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of aircraft electronic equipment/circuit breaker location. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom Qualified- Demonstrated knowledgeandunderstandingof the dutiesand responsibilitiesof each crewmember. Conditionally Qualified-Not familiarwithsome crewmemberduties and responsibilities. Unqualified - Inadequateknowledge of crewmember duties and responsibilities. 2. Knowledge of conditions of flight 3. Systemknowledge Qualified -Demonstrated a basic knowledge of aircrat?systemsto include normal and degraded operatingmodes. Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from above. Unqualified systems. Lack of familiarity with aircraft AREA D: TACTICAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION * 1. Navigation heading/trackingsystems Qualified - Demonstrated understanding of Flight ConditionsII, III, IV, and V. Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understandall the implications of the flight conditions. Unqualified conditions. Lacked understandingof flight

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with aircraft electronicequipment/circuitbreakerlocation.

*4. Equipment readiness *Critical Areas/Subareas 26-7

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

Qualified- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of the properuse of all heading/trackingsystems. Conditionally Qualified-Minor the above. deviationsfrom

Qualified-Obtained, plotted, andloggedthebest possibleposition and wind at least onceper hour. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. Unqualified-Failed tions or wind. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity that could have significantly affectedsuccessof mission. ‘2. Navigation positioning/fixing systems Qualified-Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of the properuseof all positioning/fixing systems. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

to obtain, plot, or log posi-

*2. Navigation systemsmonitoring Qualified - Properly monitored navigation systems and conducted routine velocity, TAS, and headingchecks. Flight station notified whenever aircraft altitude passedto within 1,000feet above a hazardto navigation or restrictedareawithin 30 nm of intendedroute of flight. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified-Lack of familiarity with equipment could havesignificantly affectedthe success ofthe mission. 3. Radios/KS Qualified - Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of radiosiICS equipment. Conditionally Qualifiedthe above. Minor deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Failed to monitor systemsand/or conduct routine system checks. Failed to notify flight station of navigation hazardsor restricted areas. *3. Celestial observation/computation/plotting Qualified - Demonstrateda proficiency in observing,computing, andplotting celestialbodies. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with equipment that could havesignificantly affectedsuccess of mission. 4. Navigation/pod utilization Qualified-Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of peripheralnavigation systemsto include IAS, altimeter, OAT, TAS, and utilization of AST-4, AST-6, ALQ-167, ALE-43, ALQ-170 pods and associatedcontrol boxes. Conditionally Qualitied - Minor deviationsfrom the above. Unqualified - Demonstrateda lack of familiarity with equipment that could have significantly affected successof mission. ‘AREA E: IN-FLIGHT NAVIGATION PROCEDURES ‘1. Hourly position and wind requirements

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with celestial observation/computation/plotting. *AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES * 1. Fire of unknown origin Qualified-Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of individual crewmember duties. Demonstrated properuseof fire extinguisher,oxygenbottles,and similar equipment.Promptly reportedto the TAC/ EWO the statusof the emergencymessage. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified-Improper useof emergencyequipment that may have resultedin personalinjury or death to himself or other crewmembers.Significant lack of knowledge of requiredduties.

*Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL 26-S

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

‘2. Ditching Qualified - Properly completedin a timely manner all emergencycommunication duties.Demonstrated knowledge of all crewmember duties, exits, location of liferafts. Station fully rigged for ditching. Conditionally Qualified t?om above. Minor discrepancies

seat fully lowered, headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened.No loosegearat station. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta safetyhazardresulting in injury or death. 2. Postflight procedures

Unqualified - Failed to prepareemergencymessage in a timely manner. Lacked significant knowledgeofcrewmemberresponsibilities.Loose gearadrift. NAV/EWO stationnot fully riggedfor ditching. *3. Bailout Qualified - Preparedemergency messageand properly donned parachutein a timely manner. Thorough knowledge of bailout and postbailout procedures. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Qualified - Ensured all EW and navigation equipment secured and all logs and records complete. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Failed to securenavigation equipment or complete logs and records. 3. Maintenancedebrief Qualified -Navigation system discrepancies properly recorded and INS error data logged/ reported. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Failed to prepareemergencymessagein a timely manner. Improperly or untimely donning of parachute. Lack of knowledge of bailout or postbailoutprocedures. *4. Emergencies(other) Qualified - Properly reactedto simulated emergenciessuch as smoke/fume removal, APU tire, brake fire, explosive/rapid decompression. Displayed thorough knowledge of emergency procedures. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergencyprocedures.Did not effectivelyassist pilot in directing crew in emergency situation. Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of emergencyprocedures. AREA G: LAHDIHGiPOSTFLIGHT 1. Preparationfor landing Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, *Critical Areas/Subareas 26.9

Unqualified - Failed to record maintenance discrepanciesor log/reportINS error data. 26.15 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA *AREA A: PREFLIGHT Cl. Flight planning Qualified - Attended brief as directed and bad knowledge of known equipment discrepancies. Had adequate teletypepaper,crypt0 keying material, communication publication, and message blanks on board. Had knowledge of frequencies andcall signsexpectedto be usedduringthe flight. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

Unqualified - Insufficient teletype paper or crypt0 keying material on board, no communication publications on board, or bad no knowledge

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

EP9J MOD INFLIGHT COMMUNICATOR

NATOPS EVALUATION

WORKSHEET

REQUIREMENT

DATE

COMPLETED

-

-

-

-

N 10197

Figure 26-Z. MOD In-Flight CommunicatorNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet(Sheet1 of 2) ORIGINAL 26-10

NAVAIR

Ol-75PAA.1.3

EP-3J

MOD INFLIGHT

COMMUNICATOR

NATOPS

EVALUATION

WORKSHEET

Figure 26-2. MOD In-Flight Communicator

NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

26-11

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA.1.3

of frequenciesand call signs expectedto be used during flight. InsuffIcient knowledge of known equipment discrepancies. 2. Knowledge of APU Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of APU visual inspection and operational limitations. Conditionally Qualified knowledge of APU. Lacked detailed

equipment is inoperative or operatingat reduced efficiency. Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a complete or timely statusreport. Unqualified - Failed to report equipment status to TACIEWO. AREA B: PRETAKEOFF *I. Knowledge of conditions of flight Qualified- Demonstratedknowledgeandunderstandingof Flight Conditions II, III, IV, andV. Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understandall the implications of all flight conditions. Unqualified - Had no knowledge of the flight conditions or lacked understandingof them. *2. Knowledge of observerduties

Unqualified - Significant lack of knowledge of APU. ‘3. Positional preflight Qualified-Performed a completevisual inspection and demonstrateda thorough knowledge of preflight procedures. Properly evaluatedresultsof testsand checks. Conditionally Qualified - Omissions and deviations from visual inspection and/or preflight resulting in partial determination or equipment status or did not demonstratea thoroughknowledgeof preflight procedures. Unqualified - No visual inspection or preflight performed or major discrepancies resulting in erroneous determination of equipment status or lacked significant knowledge of NATOPS preflight procedures. *4. Personalsurvival equipment Qualified - Safety and survival equipmentcomplete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute. Demonstratedathoroughknowledgeof use and location of personalsurvival equipment. Conditionally Qualified deviations noted. Minor omissions or

Qualified - Established ICS communications with the flight station prior to enginestarts.Demonstratedproperprocedures for monitoring engine startsandcontact reporting.Complied with safety precautionsas outlined in applicabledirectives. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

Unqualified - Failed to establishKS communications or lacked knowledge of proceduresfor monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts. Failed to observesafetyprecautionsasoutlined in apphcabledirectives. ‘3. Preparationfor takeoff Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed),visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harnesssecurely fastened.No loosegear at station. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted from those items listed above. Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazard could result in injury or death.

Unqualified- Equipment not completedor major omissions or deviationsnoted from Qualified. 5. Equipment statusreport (to TACYEWO) Qualified-Reported resultsofequipmentchecks and tests to the TACYEWO, indicating which *Critical Areas/Subareas

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

AREA C: AFTER TAKEOFF 1. In-flight equipment checks/communications established Qualitled - Initiated checks of assignedequipment immediately when Condition III set. Promptly established (attempted to establish) communications with controllmg station as soon as practicable after setting of Condition IIl or on command of the mission commander. Conditionally Qualified - Unable to establish communications because of lack of familiarity with communication equipment or publications, causing undue delay. Did not check all assigned equipment. Unqualified - Unable to establish communications becauseof equipment malfunctions overlooked during equipment preflight or no attempt madeto establishcommunicationsexpeditiously. Did not check any assignedequipment. 2. Reportedcommunication conditions to pilot Qualitied - Properly reportedto the pilot the establishment of communications with controlling station. Conditionally Qualified-Undue delay in reporting establishmentof communicationsto pilot. Unqualified - Failure to report establishmentof communicationsto pilot. 3. Equipment statusreport Qualified - Promptly reportedresults of equipment checksto TAC/EWO. Conditionally Qualified plete statusrepott. Failed to give com-

Qualified- Had a detailedknowledgeof location and useof fire extinguisher,portableoxygen bottles, first-aid kits, tire ax, water breakers,antiexposure suits, liferafts, emergency radios, emergencybuoy, exit lights, andotherequipmentofthis generalcategory. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledgeof thoseitems listed above. Unqualified - Demonstrateda significant lack of knowledgeor understandingof thoseitems listed above. ‘2. Aircraft systemsand circuit breakerlocation Qualified- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of contentsand circuit breakerlocation of the hydraulic service centerand the main electrical load center. Had knowledge of circuit breaker and equipmentlocation of the inertial, AHRS, UHF 1 and 2, VHF, VOR 1 and 2, tacan,ADF, marker beacon, IFF, altimeter, autopilot, cabin exhaust fan, and other systems normally energized for minimum crew evaluations. Conditionally Qualified-Minor thoselisted above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Had significant lack of knowledge of thoseitems listed above. AREA E: POSITIONAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION/KNOWLEDGE *l. HF-1, HF-2, and HF-3 Qualified-Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of the controls, operation, and limitations of the transceivers,HF couplers, loran coupler and I-IF control boxes. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked thorough knowledge of equipment operation and limitations. Did not fully understandthe function(s) of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified-Lack of familiarity with equipment that could result in damageto equipment.Signiticantly lacked a detailed knowledge of equipment controls and/orunfamiliar with equipmentoperation andlimitations.

Unqualified - Failed to report results of equipment checksto TAUEWO. *AREA D: GENERAL AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT *l. Aircraft emergency, safety, and survival equipment

*Critical Areas/Subareas 26-13 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-XiPAA-1.3

2. MD 1201 Qualified - Demonstrateda detailed knowledge of all equipmentoperatingcontrolsandequipment capabilities and limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of MD 1201equipment that could result in damageto equipmentcapabilities andlimitations. Did not understandthe function of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with MD 1201 equipment that could result in damageto equipment. 3. Teletype Qualified-Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of the controls, operation, and limitations of the teletypewriter and TTY crypt0 unit. Had knowledgeof securityprecautionspertainingto theTTY crypt0 unit. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a thorough knowledge of equipment operation and limitations. Did not fully understandthe function(s) of all operatingcontrols. Unqualitied-Lackofknowledgeofsecurityprecautionsthat could result in the disclosureof classified material. Significantly lacked a thorough knowledge of equipmentcontrols and/orunfamiliar with equipmentoperationand limitations. 4. ICS equipment Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of all functions and capabilities of the KS. Had knowledge of all operating controls and their functions. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a thorough knowledge of KS. Not familiar with all ICS operating controls. Unqualified - Failed to demonstratea thorough knowledge of ICS functions and capabilities.Significantly lacked understandingof ICS operating controls and their functions. 5. Logs and records

completely neat and up-to-dateat all times. Conditionally Qualified - Some information incomplete. Logs were confusing and obviously disordered. Unqualified - Did not maintain logs and records of flight. ‘6. Communications procedures Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of communication publications/plans and procedures.Demonstratedproper authentication procedureand familiarity with contentsanduseof crypt0 publications carried on the aircraft. Demonstratedathoroughknowledgeof currentinstmctions for security of classified material. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations or omissions noted from above. Unqualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of communication publications/plansor procedures. Demonstratedimproper use of authenticationtables or unfamiliarity with the contentsand use of crypt0 publications. Demonstrated a lack of knowledge of current instructions for security of classified material that could result in a security violation. *AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES * 1. Fire of unknown origin Qualified-Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of duties, equipment,and circuit breakerlocation. Demonstrated properuseof tire extinguisher,oxygen bottles, and similar equipment.Promptly investigatedand reportedsituation to TAC/EWO. Conditionally Qualified-Minor items required for Qualified. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Demonstrated improper use of emergencyequipmentthat could have resultedin persona1 injury or deatheither to himself or other crewmembers.Significant lack of knowledge of requiredduties.

*2. Ditching Qualified-Maintained *Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL 26-14 all logs and kept records

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Qualified - Properly rigged station in a timely manner.Had a thoroughknowledge of duties,exits, andpertinent survival equipment. Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations items requiredfor Qualified. from 2.

Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazardthat could result in injury or death. Postflight procedures Qualified - Demonstratedthorough knowledge of postflight responsibilities, ensuring all equipment secured.Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and reported as directed. All equipmentdiscrepancies properly logged. Conditionally Qualified- Minor omissionsin securing equipmentor logging discrepancies. Unqualified - Improper handling of classified material or major omissions of those items under Qualified. 26.16 RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA ‘AREA A: PREFLIGHT * 1. Flight planning Qualified - Attended brief and had knowledge of known equipmentdiscrepancies. Obtainedsufticient VHS videotapes,logs,writing instruments. Suitable charts(radarnavigation)available. Conditionally Qualified - Insufficient logs, writing instruments,or video tapes. Unqualified - No VHS tapes or logs. Insufficient knowledge of known equipment discrepancies. 2. Knowledge of APU

Unqualified - Stationsnot fully rigged for ditching. Loose gear adrift. Lacked significant knowledgeof responsibilities. *3. Bailout Qualified - Familiar with bailout signal(s).Had knowledge of parachutelocation, bailout exit location. Properly donnedparachuteand otherpersonal equipment.Was timely in his preparation. Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviationsfrom the items requiredfor Qualified. Unqualified-Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lackedknowledgeofparachutelocation or bailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked personalsurvival items. ‘4. Otheremergencyprocedures Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of proceduresfor other emergenciessuchas smoke/fume removal, APU tire, brake tire, explosive/rapid decompression. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledgeof emergencyprocedures. Unqualified - Lacked a significant amount of knowledgeof emergencyprocedures. AREA G: LANDING/POSTFLIGHT * 1. Preparationfor landing Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of APU visual inspection and oper-ational limitations. Conditionally Qualified knowledge of APU. Unqualified APU. Lacked detailed

Significant lack of knowledgeof

*3. Positional preflight Qualified - Demonstratedthoroughknowledge of NATOPS preflight proceduresincluding BZ

*Critical Areas/Subareas 26-l 5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3 EP-3J MOD RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

NATOPS

EVALUATION

3.

POSITIONAL

PREFUGHT

Nt0/97

Figure 26-3. MOD RadarOperatorNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet1 of 2)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

EP3J MOD RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

:. EMEROENCY PRrxEO”RES SUBAREAS 1. FIREOF UNKNOWN ORlOIN

ADJECTNE AREA GRADE 0 co ” POlNTS EvN.“ATlON AOJECTNE GRADE - (OPNNINST 3710.7, I ,

2.DlTCHlNG

4. 07”ER EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

I

I

I

I

I

Asterisk (‘) denotes titicat areahbarea NlOl97

Figure.26-3. MOD Radar OperatorNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet2 of 2)

26-17

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

and VHS recording and annotation. Properly evaluatedresultsandinitiated correctiveaction for all discrepancie-s. Conditionally Qualified - Omissions and deviations from preflight resultedin partial dete.rmination of equipmentstatusor did not demonstrate a tborougbknowledgeof NATOPS preflight proCdUlW.

Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understand all tbe implications of Battle Condition I and/ortbe flight conditions. Unqualified - Had no knowledge of tbe battle condition/flight conditions or lacked understandingof them. l 2. Knowledge of observerduties Qualified - Established ICS communications with tbe tligbt station prior to enginestarts.Demonstratedproperproceduresformonitoringengine startaandcontact reporting.Complied with safety precautionsas outlined in applicabledirectives. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

Unqualified - No preflight performedor major omissionsresulting in erroneousdeterminationof equipmentstatus.Significantly lacked howledge of NATOPS preflight procedures. No VHS video recordingor tape annotation. *4. Personalsurvival equipment Qualified - Safety and survival equipment complete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly,survival vest, and parachute. Demonstrated a thorougbknowledgeof use and location of personalsurvival equipment. Conditionally Qualified deviationsnoted. Minor omissions or

Unqualified - Failed to establishICS communications or lacked knowledge of proceduresfor monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts. Failed to observesafetyprecautionsasoutlined in applicabledirectives. l 3. Preparationfor takeoff Qualified - Helmet donned(as directed),visor down and locked, gloveson, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered. Headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted from those items listed above. Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazardthat could result in injury or death. ARBA C: AFTER TAKEOFF

Unqualified - Equipment preflight not completedormajoromissionsordeviationsnotedfrom Qualified. 5. Equipment statusreport (to TAC/EWO) Qualified - Reported results of equipment checks and tests to tbe TACYEWO, indicating which equipmentis inoperativeor operatingat reducedcapability. Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a cornplete or timely statusreport. Unqualified to TACIEWO. Failed to reportequipmentstatus

1. In-flight equipment checks Qualified - Initiated checks of assignedequip ment immediately when Condition III set. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

ARBA B:,PRETAKEOFF *l. Knowledge of conditions of flight Qualified - Demonstratedknowledge and understandingof Battle Condition I and Flight Conditions II, III, IV, and V.

Unqualified - Failed to check equipmentwhen Condition III set. 2. Equipment statusreport

*Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL 25-15

NAVAIR

01-75PAA-1.3

Qualified - Promptly reportedresultsof equipment checksto TAC/EWO. Conditionally Qualified plete statusreport. Failed to give com-

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of all radar/B* equipment limitations and capabilities. Did not understandthe function of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with radar/B’ that could result in damageto equipment or personnel.Significantly lackeda detailedknowledge of radar/B eqmpmentcontrols and equipmentcapabilities and limitations or failed to meet the requirementsof Conditionally Qualified. 2. BZ system

Unqualified - Failed to report results of equipment checks to TAC/EWO. ‘AREA D: GENERAL AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT * 1. Aircmfi emergency, safety,andsurvival equipment Qualified - Had a detailed knowledge of location and useof fire extinguishers,portableoxygen bottles, first-aid kits, tire ax, water breakers,antiexposuresuits, liferafts, emergencyradios, emergency sonobuoy,exit lights, and other equipment of this generalcategory. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of thoseitems listed above. Unqualitied - Demonstrateda significant lack of knowledge or understandingof those items listed above. *2. Aircraft systemsand circuit breakerlocation Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledgeofcontents andcircuit breakerlocationof the hydraulic service center and the main electrical load center.Had knowledgeof circuit breakerand equipmentlocation of the inertial, AHRS, UHF 1 and 2, VHF, VOR 1 and 2, tacan,ADF, marker beacon, IFF, altimeter, autopilot, cabin exhaust fan, and other systems normally energized for minimum crew evaluations. Conditionally Qualified from thoselisted above. Minor deviations

Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all equipment operating controls and equipment capabilities and limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of B* equipment that could result in damageto equipment,personnelor limit capabilities. Did not understand the function of all operating controls. Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with B* equipment that could result in damageto equipment or personnel.Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of B’ equipment controls and equip ment capabilitiesand limitations or failed to meet the requirementsof Conditionally Qualified. 3. VHS video recorder Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledgeof VHS video equipmentoperatingcontrols and equipmentcapabilitiesand limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of VHS video capabilities and limitations. Did not understandthe function of all operating controls. Unqualified - Lacked familiarity with VHS video equipment that could result in damage to equipment. Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of video equipmentcontrols andcapabilities and limitations or failed to meet requirementsof Conditionally Qualified. 4. KS equipment Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of all functions and capabilities of the ICS.

Unqualified - Had significant lack of knowledgeof thoseitems listed above. AREA E: EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION * 1. Radarequipment Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledgeof all radar/B* equipmentoperatingcontrols and equipmentlimitations and capabilities.

*Critical Areas/Subareas
26-19 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Had knowledgeof all operatingcontrols andtheir functions. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a thorough knowledge of ICS. Not familiar with all ICS operating controls. Unqualified - Failed to demonstrate a thorough knowledge of ICS functions and capabilitiessigniticantly lacked understandingof ICS operating controls and their functions. 5. Logs and records Qualified - Maintained all radar/B’ logs and kept recordscompletely, neatandup-to-dateat all times. Conditionally Qualified - Some information incomplete. Logs were confusing and obviously disordered. Unqualified - Did not maintain radar/B* logs and recordsof flight. *AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES l l. Fireofunknownorigin Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of duties, equipmentand circuit breaker location. Demonstrated proper use of fire extinguishers, oxygen bottles, and similar equipment. Promptly investigated and reported situation to TAC/EWO. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from items requiredfor Qualified. Unqualifted - Demonstrated improper use of emergencyequipment that could haveresultedin personal injury or deatheither to himself or other crewmembers. Significant lack of knowledge of required duties. *2. Ditching Qualified - Properly rigged station in a timely manner. Had a thoroughknowledgeof duties,exits, andpertinent survival equipment. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from items requiredfor Qualified. *Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL 26-20

Unqualified - Stations not fully rigged for ditching. Loosegear or gearadrift. Lackedsigniticant knowledge of responsibilities. *3. Bailout Qualified - Familiar with bailout signal(s).Had knowledge of parachutelocation, bailout exit location. Properly donnedparachuteand other personal equipment.Was timely in his preparation. Conditionally Qualified Minor deviations from the items required for Qualified. Unqualified - Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s).Lackedknowledge of parachute location or bailout exit location. Improperly donned parachuteor lacked personalsurvival items. l 4. Other emergencyprocedures Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of procedures for other emergenciessuch as smoke/tume removal, APU tire, braketire, explosive/rapiddecompression. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergencyprocedures. Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledgeof emergencyprocedures. AREA G: LANDEXX’OSTFLIGHT * 1. Preparationfor landing Qualified - Helmet donned(as directed),visor down andlocked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harnesssecurely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified from above. Minor deviations

Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazard that could result in injury or death. 2. Postflight procedures Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of postflight responsibilities, ensuring all equipment secured.Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and tapes and reported as

NAVAIR
EPQJ MOD C2W STATION 1 AND 2 OPERATORS NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

Ol-75PAA-1.3

N10197

Figure 26-4. MOD C3CM Station 1 and2 Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 1 of 2)

26-21

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR

0%75PAA-f.3

“’

I, “I

‘,‘:* ,::::

Asterisk

(‘) denotes

critical

area/subarea

Figure 264.

MOD C3CM Station 1 and 2 Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

ORIGINAL

26-22

NAVAIR

M-75?AA-1.3

directed. All equipment discrepanciesproperly logged. Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions in securingequipmentor logging discrepancies. Unqualified - Improper handling of classified material or major omissions of those items under Qualified.
26.17 C2W STATION 1 AND 2 OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

‘4. Personalsurvival equipment Qualified - Safety and survival equipmentcomplete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute.Demonstratedathoroughknowledgeof use and location of personalsurvival equipment. Conditionally Qualified deviations noted. Minor omissions or

Unqualified- Equipmentnot completedor major omissions or deviationsnoted from preflight. 5. Equipment statusreport Qualified-Reportedresultsofequipmentchecks and tests to the TAC/EWO in a timely manner, indicating which equipment is inoperativeor operatingat reducedefficiency. Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a complete or timely statusreport. ‘.Unqualifled- Failed to report equipmentstatus to TACiEWO. AREA B: PRETAKEOFF
*1. Knowledge of conditions of flight

‘AREA A: PREFLIGHT ‘1. Flight planning Qualified - Attended brief as directed and had knowledge of known equipmentdiscrepancies. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

Unqualified - Insufficient knowledge of known equipmentdiscrepancies. 2. Knowledge of APU Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of APU visual inspection and operational limitations. Conditionally Qualified knowledgeof APU. Unqualified APU. Lacked detailed

Qualified-Demonstrated knowledgeandunderstandingof Battle Condition I and Flight Conditions II, III, IV, and V. Conditionally Qualified-Did not fully understand all the implications of all battle/flight conditions. Unqualified - Had no knowledge of the battle/ flight conditionsor lackedunderstanding of them. ‘2. Knowledge of observerduties Qualified - Established KS communications with the flight station prior to enginestarts.Demonstratedproperprocedures formonitoringengine startsandcontactreporting.Complied with safety precautionsas outlined in applicabledirectives. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

Significant lack of knowledge of

*3. Positional preflight Qualified- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge ofpreflight procedures. Properly evaluatedresults of testsand checks. Conditionally Qualified - Omissions and deviations from preflight resulting in partial determination of equipmentstatusor did not demonstratea thoroughknowledge of preflight procedures. Unqualified - No preflight performed or major discrepancies resulting in erroneous determination of equipment status or lacked significant knowledgeof NATOPS preflight procedures. *Critical Areas/Subareas 26-23

Unqualified-Failed to establishICS communications or lacked knowledge of proceduresfor monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts.
ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Failed to observesafetyprecautionsasoutlined in applicable directives. *3. Preparationfor takeoff Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted from thoseitems listed above. Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazard could result in injury or death. AREA C: AFTER TAKEOFF 1. In-flight equipmentchecks Qualified - Initiated checks of assignedequipment immediately when Condition III set. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor deviations

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledgeof those items listed above. Unqualified- Demonstrateda significant lack of knowledge or understandingof those items listed above. *2. Aircraft systemsand circuit breakerlocation Qualified- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of contentsand circuit breakerlocation of the hydraulic service centerandthe main electrical load center. Had knowledge of circuit breaker and equipmentlocation of the inertial, AHRS, UHF 1 and 2, VHF, VOR 1 and 2, tacan, ADF, marker beacon, IFF, altimeter, autopilot, cabin exhaust fan, and other systems normally energized for minimum crew evaluations. Conditionally Qualified-Minor thoselisted above. Unqualified-Hadsignificant of thoseitems listed above. deviationsfrom lackofknowledge

AREA E: POSITIONAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION/KNOWLEDGE The following descriptions pertain to subareas 1 through 7. Qualified-Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of equipment operating controls and equipment capabilities and limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not understandthe function(s) of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified- Lack of familiarity with equipment that could result in damageto equipment.Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of equipment capabilities and limitations or failed to meet the requirementsof Conditionally Qualified. *AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES * 1. Fire of unknown origin Qualified- Demonstrateda thoroughknowledge of duties, equipment and circuit breakerlocation. Demonstrated properuseof fire extinguisher,oxy-

Unqualified - Failed to check equipmentwhen Condition III was set. 2. Equipment statusreport Qualified - Promptly reportedresults of equipment checksto TAC/EWO. Conditionally Qualified plete statusreport. Failed to give com-

Unqualified - Failed to report results of equipment checksto TAC/EWO. *AREA D: GENERAL AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT * 1. Aircraft emergency, safety,andsurvival equipment Qualified- Had a detailedknowledgeof location anduse of fire extinguisher,portable oxygenbottles, first-aid kits, fire ax, water breakers,antiexposure suits, liferafts, emergencyradios, emergencybuoy, exit lights, andotherequipmentofthis generalcategory.

*Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL 26-24

NAVAIR

6%75PAA-I.3

gen bottles, and similar equipment.Promptly investigatedand reportedsituation to TACYEWO. Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations items requiredfor Qualified. from

AREA G: LANDING AND POSTFLIGHT * 1. Preparationfor landing Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified-Minor above. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Demonstrated improper use of emergencyequipmentthat could have resultedin personalinjury or deatheither to himself or other crewmembers.Significant lack of knowledge of requiredduties. ‘2. Ditching Qualified - Properly rigged station in a timely manner.Had a thoroughknowledge of duties,exits, and pertinentsurvival equipment. Conditionally Qualified-Minor items required for Qualified. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Deviations that would present a potential safety hazardthat could result in injury or death. 2. Postflight duties Qualified - All equipment securedat C3CM-1 and C3CM-2 stations.Attended mission debriefing with appropriatelogs andreportedasdirected. All equipmentdiscrepancies properly logged. Conditionally Qualitied- Minor omissionsin securing equipmentor logging discrepancies. Unqualified - Failed to secureany equipment. Failed to log all equipment discrepanciesat the stations.Major deviations from the items required for Qualified.
26.16 IN-FLIGHT TECHNICIAN EVALUATION GRADING NATOPS CRITERIA

Unqualified - Station not fully rigged for ditching. Loose gearadrift. Lacked significant knowledgeof responsibilities.
‘3.

Bailout Qualified - Familiar with bailout signal(s).Had knowledge of parachutelocation, bailout exit location. Properly donnedparachuteand other personalequipment.Was timely in his preparation. Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviationsfrom the items requiredfor Qualified. Unqualified-Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lackedknowledgeofparachutelocationorbailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked essentialpersonalsurvival items.

*AREA A: PREFLIGHT *I. Flight planning Qualified - Had knowledge of known equipment discrepancies.Applicable test equipment, publications, toolbox, and in-flight maintenance kit on board aircraft. Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions noted,suchasincomplete toolbox or publications. Unqualified - No test equipmentor publications or toolbox on board the aircraft. Insufficient knowledgeof known equipment discrepancies. 2. Knowledge of APU

‘4.

Otheremergencyprocedures Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of proceduresfor other emergenciessuch assmoke/fume removal, APU tire, brake tire, explosive/rapid decompression. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledgeof emergencyprocedures. Unqualified - Lacked a significant amount of knowledgeof emergencyprocedures.

*Critical Areas/Subareas
26-25 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR OI-75PAA-I.3

EPJJ

MOD INFL.IGHT

TECHNICIAN

NATOPS cam

EVALUATION

WORKSHEET lxx

Asterisk

(7 denoles

critical

area/subarea

N10/97

Figure 26-5. In-Flight TechnicianNATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet1 of 2)

ORIGINAL

26-26

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

EP-3J

MOD INFLIGHT

TECHNICIAN

NATOPS

EVALUATION

WORKSHEET

N10197

Figure 26-S. In-Flight Technician NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet2 of 2)

26-27

ORIGINAL

Qualified-Demonstratedthoroughknowledge ofAPUvisual inspectionandoperationalhmitations. Conditionally Qualified knowledge of APU. Lacked detailed

AREA B: PRETAKEOFF *1. Knowledge of conditions of flight Qualified-Demonstrated knowledgeandunderstandingof Battle Condition I and Flight Conditions II, III, IV, and V. Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understand all the implications of Battle Condition I and/orthe flight conditions. Unqualified - Had no knowledge of the battle condition/flight conditions or lacked understandingof them.
‘2.

Unqualified - Significant lack of knowledge of APU.
*3. Positional preflight

Qualified - Performeda complete visual inspection of all bays, racks and equipmentfor installation and security. Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of preflight procedures.Preparedto repair or replace any malfunctioning electronic equipment. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations or omissions notedfrom proceduresoutlined above. Unqualified-No visual inspection performed or lacked significant knowledge of preflight procedures.
*4.

Knowledgeof observerduties Qualified - Established KS communications with the light station prior to engine starts.Demonstratedproperprocedures formonitoringengine startsandcontact reporting.Complied with safety precautionsas outlined in applicable directives. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor omissions

Personalsurvival equipment Qualified - Safety and survival equipment complete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute. Demonstrated a thorough knowledgeof location and utilization of personal survival equipment. Conditionally Qualified deviationsnoted. Minor omissions or Unqualified - Failed to establishICS communications or lacked knowledge of proceduresfor monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts. Failed to observesafetyprecautionsasoutlined in applicabledirectives.
‘3.

Preparationfor takeoff Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloveson, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened.No loose gearat station. Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted from those items listed above. Unqualified - Deviations that would present a potential safety hazard could result in injury or death.

Unqualified-Equipment notcompletedormajor omissions or deviations noted from Qualified. 5. Equipment statusreport (to TAC/EWO) Qualified-Reportedresultsofequipmentchecks and tests to the TAC/EWO in a timely manner, indicating which equipment is inoperativeor operatingat reducedeffectiveness. Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a complete or timely statusreport Unqualified - Failed to report equipment status to TACYEWO. *Critical Areas/Subareas
ORIGINAL 26-26

AREA C: AFTER TAKEOFF * 1. Maintenanceprocedures

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Qualified - Performed maintenance procedures in accordancewith the applicable manuals. Had a thorough knowledge of operation of the equipment. Conditionally Qualified noted. Minor deviations

AREA F: C3CM EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE (Gradingcriteria below coversall subareas in this area.) Qualified - Demonstrateda detailedknowledge ofall C3CM equipment,operatingcontrols,equip ment capabilities,and limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of C3CM equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understandthe tbnction of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified - Lacked familiarity with C3CM, that could result in equipment damage. Signiticantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipmentcontrolsor limitations. *2. Aircrat? systemsandcircuit breakerlocation

Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazardthat could result in injury or death,damageto equipment,or lacked significantknowledgeof operationof the test equipment or equipmentundertest. AREA D: COMMUNICATION KNOWLEDGE EQUIPMENT

(Gradingcriteria below coversall subareas in this area.) Qualified - Demonstrateda detailed knowledge of all communication equipment, operating controls, equipmentcapabilities, andlimitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledgeofcommunication equipmentcapabilities and limitations. Did not fully understandthe function of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified-Lacked familiarity with communication equipment,that could result in equipment damage. Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipment controls or limitations. AREA E: NONACOUSTIC EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE (Gradingcriteria below coversall subareas in this area.) Qualified - Demonstrateda detailed knowledge of all nonacousticequipment,operating controls, equipmentcapabilities,and limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of nonacousticequipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understandthe function of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified- Lackedfamiliarity with nonacoustic, that could resultin equipmentdamage.Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipmentcontrols or limitations. AREA G: NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE (Gradingcriteriabelow coversall subareas in this area.) Qualified - Demonstrateda detailed knowledge of all navigation equipment, operating controls, equipmentcapabilities, and limitations. Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of navigation equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understand the function of all operatingcontrols. Unqualified - Lacked familiarity with navigation, that could result in equipmentdamage.Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communicationequipmentcontrolsor limitations. *AREA H: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES *l Fire of unknown origin Qualified- Demonstrated a thoroughknowledge of duties,equipmentand circuit breakerlocation. Demonstrated properuseof tire extinguisher,oxygen bottles, and similar equipment.Promptly investigatedand reportedsituation to TAC/EWO. Conditionally Qualified-Minor items requiredfor Qualified. deviationsfrom

Unqualified - Demonstrated improper use of emergencyequipmentthat could have resultedin *Critical Areas/Subareas 26-29 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

personalinjury or deatheither to himself or other crewmembers. Significant lack of knowledge of requiredduties. *2. Ditching Qualified - Properly rigged station in a timely manner.Had a thorough knowledgeof duties,exits, and pertinent survival equipment. Conditionally Qualified-Minor items requiredfor Qualified. deviationsfrom

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergencyprocedures. Unqualified - Lacked a significant amount of knowledgeof emergencyproceduies. AREA I: LANDINGE’OSTFLIGHT *I. Preparationfor landing Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seatback fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrestproperly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harnesssecurely fastened.No loose gear at station. Conditionally Qualified from above.
Minor deviations

Unqualified - Stationsnot fully rigged for ditching. Loose gear adrift. Lacked significant knowledgeof responsibilities. ‘3. Bailout Qualified - Familiar with bailout signal(s).Had knowledge of parachutelocation, bailout exit location. Properly donnedparachuteand other personalequipment.Was timely in his preparation. Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations the items required for Qualified. from

Unqualified - Deviations that would presenta potential safety hazardthat could result in injmy or death. 2. Postflight procedures Qualified-Inventoried tool kit, assistedin securing avionic equipment, and logged equipment discrepancies. Conditionally Qualified-Minor omissionsin securing equipment or logging discrepancies. Unqualified - Improper handling of classified material or major omissions of those items under Qualified.

Unqualified -Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lackedknowledgeofparachutelocation or bailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked personalsurvival items. *4. Other emergencyprocedures Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of procedures for other emergenciessuch as smoke/fume removal, APU fire, brake fire, explosive/rapid decompression.

*Critical Areas/Subareas ORIGINAL
26.30

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

PART XI

Performance

Data

Containedin P-3A/Et/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1). Chapter27 -Performance Data Inlmduction Chapter28 -Engine Performance Data Chapter29 -Takeoff Chapter 30 - Approachand Landing Chapter3 1- Climb and Descent Chapter32 -Flight Planning Chapter33 - OperatingTables

49 (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAlR 01.75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 27

Performance

Data Introduction

ContainedinNAVAIR Ol-7SPAC-1

27-l (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

28

Engine

Performance
Contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

Data

28-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR Ol-?WAA-1.3

CHAPTER 29

Takeoff
Containedin NAVAIR 01-?SPAC-1

29-l (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER

30

Approach
Contained

and Planning
in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

30-I (Reverse Blank)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER

31

Climb and Descent
31.1 CLIMB CONTROL CHARTS The charts(Figures3 l-1 through 3 l-l 2) show climb performance with four, three,and two enginesoperating at normal rated power. The performanceis shown in terms of distance,time, and fuel to climb and provides the airspeedschedulethat must be used to realize the performance shown. The weight lines are based on climbs from sealevel at the listed initial climb weights. The curves include allowancesfor fuel burnout during climb,; that is, a curve labeled 120,000poundsactnrdly represents tbeperfomranceat a weight equalto 120,000 poundsminus the fuel consumedin reachingthealtitude at which the curve is read.Each curve includes corrections that shouldbe usedto accountfor nonstandard air temperature conditions.

31-l

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

DISTANCE-

NAVTICAL

MlLES

Figure 31-12. Four-EngineClimb Control -

Normal Rated Power Climb Performance -

Confgumtion E

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%ZiPAA-1.3

CHAPTER

32

Flight Planning
Containedin NAVAIR 01-‘ISPAC-I

32-l (Roveme Blank)

NAVAIR

0%75PAA-I.3

CHAPTER

33

Operating Tables
33.3 USE OF OPERATING TABLES The operating tables (Figures 33-l through 33-23) are designed primarily for use in flight to accomplish flight plans developed from material in Chapter 10.

33-l

ORIGINAL

I

NAVAIR

CM-75PAA-I.3

INDEX
PO@ NO. A Page NO.

D

AK-22 intercommunication system ...... AircraA ...................... Command and control warfare station (C2Wl andC2W2) ............ Flight station ................... In-flight communicator station ........ Mission equipmentconfiguration ....... Navigatorklectmnic warfareoffker station ................... Radaroperatorstation ............ Station 8A. .................. Tactical coordinator/electronic warfare officerstation ............... All-weather operation ............. AN/ALQ-170 position display indicator .... AN/ALQ-170(V) system ............ AN/ARC-l59 UHF 1 radio system ....... AN/ARC-182, VHF/UHF system ........ AN/ARC-187 SATCOM system (with securevoice) ............ AN/ARC-190(V): HF radio set .................. Operatingprocedures............. System .................... ANIOSQ-113(V)l radio countermeasures system ................... Auxiliary intercommunicationsystem .....
B

22-l Part I l-10 l-1 I-10 l-l l-11 l-l 1 l-11 l-10 Part VI 23-2 22-34 23-l 22-50 22-15 22-8 22-l 1 22-48 22-20 22-1

Ditching.

.

.
E

.

.

12-1

Emergencyprocedures Emergencyturnoff procedures Electrical fumes of unknown origin Electrical system . . Electronic warfareoflicer . NATOPS gradingcriteria Station . Equipment,aircraft
F

Part V 22-29 12-1 2-l 244 26-l l-11 1 ‘Chapter2
.

Flight characteristics Flight station Checkride Systems . . Flightcrew coordination
H

.

Part IV l-l 26-l : Chapter23 Part IX

Hertz converter,400/60
I

.

.

2-2

Bailout .................... B* radarsimulator system ........... c C2W officers (C2Wl and C2W2) ........ C2W station 1 and 2 operatorevaluation gradingcriteria ............... C2Wstationsland2 ............. CA-33 AN/ARC-l59 UHF ........... Climb and descent ............. Climb control charts ............... Command and control warfarestation (C2Wl and C2W2) ............. Communication procedures ......... Controls,UHF .................. Currencyrequirements ..............

9-4, 12-1 22-46

24-7 26-23 .22-51 22-l 1 Chapter3 1 31-1 l-10 Part VII 22-51 6-l

In-flight communicator NATOPS evaluationgradingcriteria Station In-flight technicianNATOPS evaluation grading criteria Indoctrination Inertial navigationunit Intercommunicationsystem,AIC-22 and auxiliary ICS control
L

24-10 26-9 ‘22-46 26-25 Part II 22-57 22-1

LTN-72 intertial navigation systemno. 2 (INS 2)
M

22-26

MD-1203KJLT audio modulator Operation . . . . System . .

. .

22-50 22-52 22-42

Index-1

ORlGlNAL

NAVAIR

01-75PAA-1.3

Page No.

Messagereleasingauthority Mission: Circuit breakerpanel Equipment configuration Mission systems . Overview . . . Power requirements MT-4658/ARC-159 mount
N

19-l
. . . . . . . .

R

2-1 l-l : PanVIII Chapter21 2-l . . . 22-13
.

Radaroperator . 22-54.24-I 1 NATOPS evaluation gradingcriteria 26-15 Station . . . . l-11 Radio communications . . . . 19-I Requirements,qualification, currency,and requalification . 6-l RT-llSO/ARC-159 receiver/transmitter . 22-13

NATOPS evaluation . NATOPS evaluationgrading creiteria: C2W station 1 and 2 operator . In-flight communicator In-flight technician Navigator/electronicwarfareofficer Radaroperator . . , . Tactical coordinator . . . . NAVlEWO station/station8A . Navigator . .. . Station . . Normal procedures 0 Operatingtables,use of Operatinglimitations
P

Part X 26-23 26-9 26-25 . 26-6 26-15 . 26-l 22-55 24-4 I-11 . PartIII Servicing . . Smoke of unknown origin Station 8A . Storeslimitations Systems,aircraft
T

.

Chapter3 12-l ‘l:li,‘22-55 4-l 1 ‘Chapter2

. . ..

33-l 1Chapter4

TAC/EWO Station . Tactical coordinator/elctronicwarfare officer NATOPS evaluationgrading criteria . . Tactical crew complement Tactical electronic warfare offtcer Training and qualifications
U

22-50 26-l 6-1 24-2 ‘Chapter6

Performancedata . . . . . . . . . . . . Planecommander . . . Pod radiation areas. Position display indicator, AN/ALQ-170 Primary electrical system Procedures, communication a Qualification requirements

Part XI 24-1 3-l 23-2 2-1 Chapter19
. .

UHF controls . . . Universal pylon wiring
V

22-51 22-44

VHF/UHF system AN/ARC-l82 VHS VCR equipment
W

22-50 22-39

6-l

Wing storescontrol system WJ-8718HF scanningreceiver Wiring, universal pylon

.

22-34 22-29 22-44

Index-2

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->